2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... -...

372
2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii Your Vehicle at a Glance ..................................................................................................................... 2 Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 51 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 109 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 177 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 191 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 219 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 287 Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 295 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 323 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 339 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 345 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump. Accord Value Package Audio System Owner's Identification Form

Transcript of 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... -...

Page 1: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................2 Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 51Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 109How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 177What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 191The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 219The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 287Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 295This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 323ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 339A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 345How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Accord Value Package Audio System

Owner's Identification Form

Page 2: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Owner's Identification

This Owner's Manual should be considereda permanent part of the car, and shouldremain with the car when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in affect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwith out incurring any obligation whatsoever.

OWNER

ADDRESSSTREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE /POSTAL CODE

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESSSTREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

OWNER'S SIGNATURE

DEALER'S SIGNATURE

Page 3: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Introduction

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2001 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner's manual in your car so youcan refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helpsto keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. Whenyour car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda dealer's staff isspecially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Honda. YourHonda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 WarningWARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded by

symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

a NOTICE

Page 4: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your car. You must useyour own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

Safety Labels — on the car.Safety Messages — preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.These signal words mean:

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don't follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don't follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don't followinstructions.

Safety Headings — such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

Safety Section — such as Driver and Passenger Safety.Instructions — how to use this car correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information — please read itcarefully.

Safety3
Page 5: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Your Car at a Glance

DOOR LOCKSWITCH(P.75)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.97)

MIRRORCONTROLS(P.100)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROL(P.110)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P.125)

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE/FUEL FILL DOOR(P.80, 178)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P. 180)

DIGITAL CLOCK(P.102)

Page 6: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Your Car at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS(P. 63)

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS(P. 64, 65, 66)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER(P. 66)

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS(P. 66)

CRUISE CONTROLS(P. 68)

HORN(P. 61)

TILT ADJUSTMENT(P. 67)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS (P. 70)(EX with leather and EX-V6 models)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P. 62, 64)

CRUISE CONTROL(P. 68)

TRACTION CONTROLSYSTEM(P. 206)

MOONROOF SWITCH(P. 98)

Page 7: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

4 4

Page 8: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your car.

Important Safety Precautions.......... 6Your Car's Safety Features.............. 7

Seat Belts........................................ 8Airbags............................................ 9Seats & Seat-Backs...................... 10Head Restraints........................... 10Door Locks................................... 10Pre-Drive Safety Checklist......... 11

Protecting Adults............................. 121. Close and Lock the Doors...... 12

2. Adjust the Front Seats............ 123. Adjust the Seat-Backs............. 134. Adjust the Head Restraints.... 145. Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts...................................... 146. Adjust the Steering Wheel..... 167. Maintain a Proper Sitting

Position................................. 16Advice for Pregnant Women...... 17Additional Safety Precautions.... 18

Protecting Children......................... 19All Children Must Be

Restrained................................ 19Children Should Sit in the Back

Seat............................................ 20The Passenger's Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks toChildren................................ 20

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren.................................... 22

If a Child Requires CloseAttention................................... 23

Additional Safety Precautions.... 23General Guidelines for Using

Child Seats................................ 24Protecting Infants........................ 28

Protecting Small Children.......... 31Protecting Larger Children........ 34Using Child Seats with

Tethers...................................... 37Using the Lower Anchorages.... 38

Additional Information About YourSeat Belts.................................. 40

Seat Belt System Components... 40Lap/Shoulder Belt....................... 40Automatic Seat Belt

Tensioners................................ 41Seat Belt Maintenance................ 42

Additional Information AboutYour Airbags............................ 43

SRS Components......................... 43How Your Front Airbags

Work.......................................... 43How Your Side Airbags Work.... 45How the SRS Indicator Light

Works........................................ 45How The Side Airbag Indicator

Light Works............................. 46Airbag Service.............................. 48Additional Safety Precautions.... 48

Carbon Monoxide Hazard.............. 49Safety Labels.................................... 50

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 9: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Important Safety Precautions

You'll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Always Wear Your Seat BeltA seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your car is equippedwith airbags, make sure you andyour passengers always wear yourseat belts, and wear them properly.(See page 14.)

Restrain All ChildrenChildren are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage 19.)

Be Aware of Airbag HazardsWhile airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

7.)

Don't Drink and DriveAlcohol and driving don't mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don't drinkand drive, and don't let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Control Your SpeedExcessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Keep Your Car in Safe ConditionHaving a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page 224.)

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 10: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Your Car's Safety Features

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats & Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags*(9) Door Locks

* : If equipped

Your car is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; and a collapsible steeringcolumn.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can't take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand always wear your seat beltsproperly. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 11: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Your Car's Safety Features

Seat BeltsFor your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your car isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Why Wear Seat BeltsSeat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your car has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thecar's built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

What you should do: Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Page 12: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Your Car's Safety Features

Airbags

Your car has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision.

All V6 models and 4-cylinder EX modelare standard and DX, LX models areoptionalYour car also has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

What you should do: Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 13: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Your Car's Safety Features

Seats & Seat-BacksYour car's seats are designed to keepyou in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the car, or by aninflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt's effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat'soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

What you should do: Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever the car ismoving.

Head RestraintsHead restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Door LocksKeeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe car during a crash. It also helpsprevent occupants from accidentallyopening a door and falling out, andoutsiders from unexpectedly openingyour doors.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 14: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Your Car's Safety Features

Pre-Drive Safety ChecklistTo make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your car's safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page14).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page 19).

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page 12).

Seat-backs are upright (see page13).

Head restraints are properlyadjusted (see page 14).

All doors are closed and locked(see page 12).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page 188).

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 15: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Adults

IntroductionThe following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page 34 forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

1. Close and Lock the DoorsAfter everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

Your car has a door monitor light onthe instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door is not tightlyclosed.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the car is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the car during a crash.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page 74 for how to lock thedoors.

2.Adjust the Front Seats

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 16: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Adults

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel while stillmaintaining full control of the car.Also make sure your front seatpassenger moves the seat as far tothe rear as possible.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page 88 for how to adjust thefront seats.

3.Adjust the Seat-BacksAdjust the driver's seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Page 17: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Adults

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant's chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page 88 for how to adjust seat-backs.

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant's head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page 92 for how to adjust thehead restraints.

5.Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

Page 18: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Adults

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. This

spreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back. This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Page 19: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Adults

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash. No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt. Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourHonda dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page 40 for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

6.Adjust the Steering Wheel

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page 67 for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

7.Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thecar is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the car, orby being struck by an inflating frontairbag. Being struck by an inflatingside airbag can result in possiblyserious injuries.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 20: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Adults

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your car's airbagsand other safety features, you mustsit properly and wear your seat beltproperly.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a vehicle.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it's okay for you todrive.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Page 21: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Adults

Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts. Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag. Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked "SRS AIRBAG" in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

On models with side airbags, donot attach hard objects on or neara front door. If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers. If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbags inflate.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 22: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how to properlyprotect young passengers.

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your car, be sure toread this section.

All Children Must Be RestrainedEach year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. (See page24.)

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt. (See page34.)

Driver and Passenger Safety

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

Page 23: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Additional Precautions to ParentsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap. If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child. During acrash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.

Children Should Sit in the BackSeatAccording to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

The Passenger's Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to ChildrenFront airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger's front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's front airbag. Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 24: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's front airbag canbe hazardous. If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child's head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger'sfront airbag. Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page 34 for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

U.S. ModelsTo remind you of the passenger'sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your car haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver's and front passenger'svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 25: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Canadian ModelsTo remind you of the front airbaghazards, your car has warning labelson the driver's and front passenger'svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildrenYour car has three seating positionsin the back seat where children canbe properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thanthree children in your car:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page 34).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page 12).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page 16).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page14).

Driver and Passenger Safety

CAUTIONTO AVOID SERIOUS INJURY:FOR MAXIMUM SAFETY PROTECTION INALL TYPES OF CRASHES, YOU MUSTALWAYS WEAR YOUR SAFETY BELT.DO NOT INSTALL REARWARD-FACINGCHILD SEATS IN ANY FRONTPASSENGER SEAT POSITION.DO NOT SIT OR LEAN UNNECESSARILYCLOSE TO THE AIR BAG.DO NOT PLACE ANY OBJECTS OVER THEAIR BAG OR BETWEEN THE AIR BAGAND YOURSELF.SEE THE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR FURTHERINFORMATION AND EXPLANATIONS.

PRECAUTION:POUR EVITER DES BLESSURES GRAVES:POUR PROFITER D'UNE PROTECTIONMAXIMALE LORS D'UNE COLLISION BOUCLEZTOUJOURS VOTRE CEINTURE DE SECURITE.N'lNSTALLEZ JAMAIS UN SIEGE POURENFANTS FAISANT FACE A L'ARRIERE SURLE SIEGE DU PASSAGER AVANT.NE VOUS APPUYEZ PAS ET NE VOUS ASSEYEZPAS PRES DU COUSSIN GONFLABLE.NE DEPOSEZ AUCUN OBJET SUR LE COUSSINGONFLABLE OU ENTRE LE COUSSINGONFLABLE ET VOUS.LISEZ LE GUIDE UTILISATEUR POUR DEPLUS AMPLES RENSEIGNEMENTS.

Page 26: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

If a Child Requires CloseAttentionMany parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger's front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Additional Safety PrecautionsUse childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors. Using this feature willprevent children from opening thedoors and accidentally falling out(see page 80).

Use the main power windowswitch to prevent children fromopening the rear windows. Usingthis feature will prevent childrenfrom playing with the windows,which could expose them tohazards or distract the driver (seepage 97).

Do not leave children alone in yourvehicle. Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 27: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour car is not in use. Childrenwho play in cars can accidentallyget trapped inside the trunk.Teach your children not to play inor around cars. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener (see page 81) and decide ifyour children should be shownhow to use this feature.

Keep car keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren. Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the trunk, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

General Guidelines for UsingChild SeatsThe following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

Selecting a Child SeatTo provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

1. The child seat should meet safetystandards. The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer's statementof compliance on the box and seat.

2. The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants: Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant'shead, neck, and back. See page28 for additional information onprotecting infants.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 28: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Small Children: A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page 31 foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

3. The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

However, Honda is confident thatone or more child seat models can fitand be properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour car.

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Your car has lower anchoragesinstalled for use with Child RestraintAnchorage System-compatible childseats. For more information, seepage 38 .

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 29: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Placing a Child SeatThis page briefly summarizesHonda's recommendations on whereto place rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your car.

Front Passenger's SeatInfants: Never in the front seat, due

to the front airbag hazard.

Small children: Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt.(see page 32).

Back SeatsInfants: Recommended positions.

Properly secure a rear-facingchild seat (see page 28).

Small children: Recommendedpositions. Properly secure a front-facing child seat (see page 32).

Driver and Passenger Safety

CONTINUED

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

The passenger's front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child's head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

Page 30: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Installing a Child SeatAfter selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

1. Properly secure the child seat tothe car. All child seats aredesigned to be secured to the carwith the lap part of a lap/shoulderbelt. Some child seats can besecured to the vehicle's loweranchorages instead. A child whoseseat is not properly secured to thecar can be endangered in a crash.See pages 29, 32 and 38 forinstructions on how to properlysecure child seats in this car.

2. Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured. After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

However, a child seat does not needto be "rock solid." In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat's effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

3. Secure the child in the child seat.Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker'sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

Storing a Child SeatWhen you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the car during acrash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 31: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat TypeOnly a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby's head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant reaches the seatmaker's weight or height limit and isable to sit up without support.

Rear-Facing Child Seat PlacementIn this car, a rear-facing child seatcan be placed in any seating positionin the back seat, but not in the frontseat.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat. If the passenger'sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position. If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger's front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Page 32: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page 12). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page 13).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationThe lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle's loweranchorages, follow the instructionson page 38.

1. With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker'sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 33: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

2. To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

3. After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

4. After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

5. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 34: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby'sdoctor or follow the seat maker'srecommendations.

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat TypeA child who can sit up withoutsupport, and who fits within the childseat maker's weight and heightlimits, should be restrained in aforward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

Child Seat PlacementIn this car, the best place to install aforward-facing child seat is in one ofthe seating positions in the back seat.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's front airbag canbe hazardous. If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child's head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 35: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Child Seat InstallationThe lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle's loweranchorages, follow the instructionson page 39 .

1. With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker's instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

Page 36: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

2. To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

3. After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

4. After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

5. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 37: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Protecting Larger ChildrenWhen a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat andwear a lap/shoulder belt.

If a child is too short for the shoulderpart of the belt to properly fit, werecommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt. Follow theinstructions on page 15 . Then checkhow the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child's collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, asshown, the child is large enough towear the seat belt.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger's front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possibleand wears the seat belt properly.

Page 38: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

However, if the belt touches orcrosses the child's neck, the childneeds to use a booster seat.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck. This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm. This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt. Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt. If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Using a Booster Seat

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a style thatallows the child to use the lap/shoulder belt directly, without ashield, as shown.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker's instructions.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 39: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontThe National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

In addition, the passenger's frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild's head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child's body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

Physical SizePhysically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages 15 and 34 ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

MaturityTo safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 40: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner's manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child's seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Your car has three tether anchoragepoints under the rear window forsecuring a tether-style child seat tothe car.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 41: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point and tightenthe strap according to the child seatmaker's instructions.

Using the Lower Anchorages

Your car is equipped with loweranchorages at the outer rear seats.These anchorages are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom and are only to be used witha child seat designed to attach to thelower anchorages.

The exact location of each anchor ismarked with a small circle above thelower anchor point.

To install a child seat designed toattached to the lower anchorages:

1. Move the seat belt buckle orcenter seat belt away from theanchorages.

2. Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchorages.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchorage.

Driver and Passenger Safety

LOWER ANCHORAGES Rigid type

Page 42: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Protecting Children

3. Put the child seat in the rear leftor right vehicle seat and attach thechild seat to the lower anchoragesaccording to the child seat maker'sinstructions.

4. Follow the child seat maker'sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.

5. Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point and tightenthe strap according to the childseat maker's instructions.

6. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Flexible type

Page 43: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System ComponentsYour seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver's seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

Lap/Shoulder Belt

This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting the car,be sure the belt is out of the way andwill not get closed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver's have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages 29 and 33 for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

Driver and Passenger Safety

SHOULDERPORTION

UPPER SEATBELT ANCHOR

LATCHPLATE

BUCKLE LAP PORTION

Page 44: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page 14 for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page 45 ).

Driver and Passenger Safety

S R S

Page 45: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt MaintenanceFor safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

U.S. ModelsHonda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Honda will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use. Please see your HondaWarranty Information booklet fordetails.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,you should have your dealer inspectthe belt, and replace it if necessary.A belt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page 294 .

Driver and Passenger Safety

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Page 46: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Additional Information About Your Airbags

SRS ComponentsYour Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

Two front airbags. The driver'sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger's airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked "SRSAIRBAG."

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page 41).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page 44).

Emergency backup power in caseyour car's electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

How Your Front Airbags Work

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle's rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 47: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Additional Information About Your Airbags

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won'tinterfere with the driver's visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag's surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

U.S. Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags that came with yourowner's manual.

Canadian Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 48: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Airbags Work

Some models are equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked"SIDE AIRBAG."

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver's or the passenger'sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger's side, the passenger'sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks

The purpose of the SRSindicator light is to alert

you to a potential problem with yourfront airbags. On cars with sideairbags, this light will also alert youto a potential problem with yourautomatic seat belt tensioners (page41); or your side airbags orpassenger's side airbag automaticcutoff system (page 46).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light up brieflythen go out. This tells you that thesystem is working properly.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

SRS

Page 49: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Additional Information About Your Airbags

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger's side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, or your seat belttensioners may not work when youneed them. See your Honda dealeras soon as possible.

How The Side Airbag IndicatorLight Works

This light alerts you thatthe passenger's side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your car has anautomatic cutoff system for thepassenger's side airbag.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child's head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

Driver and Passenger Safety

SIDEAIRBAG

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

Page 50: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Additional Information About Your Airbags

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

If the side airbag indicator lightcomes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),the indicator should light briefly andgo out (see page 55). If it doesn'tlight, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 51: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag ServiceYour front and side airbag systems(if equipped) are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have your carserviced if:

Your airbags ever inflate. Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Donot try to remove or replace anyairbag by yourself.This must be done by a Hondadealer or a knowledgeable bodyshop.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem. Take your car to anauthorized Honda dealer as soonas possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags. Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason. Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water. If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer. Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

See page 187 for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 52: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Your car's exhaust contains carbonmonoxide gas. You should have noproblem with carbon monoxideentering the car in normal driving ifyou maintain your car properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The car was in an accident thatmay have damaged the underside. High levels of carbon monoxide can

collect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your car'sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

If you must sit in your parked car,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

1. Push the button.2. Select the mode.3. Turn the fan on high speed.4. Set the temperature control to a

comfortable setting.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

Page 53: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Safety Labels

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Honda dealerfor a replacement.

Driver and Passenger Safety

DASH BOARD

SUN VISOR

U.S. models

RADIATOR CAPHOOD

Canadian modelsU.S. models only

Page 54: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Instruments and Controls

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. Al l the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

Control Locations............................ 52Indicator Lights................................ 53Gauges.............................................. 58

Speedometer................................ 58Tachometer.................................. 58Odometer...................................... 58Trip Meter.................................... 59Temperature Gauge.................... 59Fuel Gauge................................... 59Maintenance Required

Indicator.................................... 60Controls Near the Steering

Wheel........................................ 61Headlights.................................... 62Automatic Lighting Off

Feature...................................... 63Daytime Running Lights............. 63

Instrument Panel Brightness..... 63Turn Signals................................. 64Windshield Wipers...................... 64Windshield Washers................... 66Hazard Warning........................... 66Rear Window Defogger.............. 66Steering Wheel Adjustment....... 67

Steering Wheel Controls ................ 68Cruise Control.............................. 68Remote Audio Controls .............. 70

Keys and Locks................................ 71Keys...............................................71Immobilizer System..................... 72Ignition Switch............................. 73Door Locks................................... 74Power Door Locks....................... 75Remote Transmitter.................... 76Childproof Door Locks............... 80Trunk............................................ 80Inside Trunk Opener................... 82Glove Box..................................... 82

HomeLink Universal Transmitter......... 83Seat Adjustments............................. 88

Front Seat Adjustments.............. 88Driver's Seat Manual Height

Adjustment............................... 89

Driver's Seat Power HeightAdjustment............................... 89

Driver's Seat Full PowerAdjustments............................. 90

Driver's Lumbar Support............ 91Front Passenger's Seat

Adjustments............................. 92Head Restraints........................... 92Folding Rear Seat........................ 93Rear Seat Armrest....................... 94Trunk Pass-through Cover......... 95

Seat Heaters..................................... 96Power Windows............................... 97Moonroof.......................................... 98Mirrors.............................................. 99

Adjusting the Power Mirrors... 100Parking Brake................................ 101Digital Clock................................... 102Console Compartment.................. 103Coin Box......................................... 103Beverage Holder............................ 104Sun Visor......................................... 105Vanity Mirror................................. 105Sunglasses Holder......................... 106Accessory Power Socket.............. 106Interior Lights................................ 107

Instruments and Controls

Page 55: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls

MIRRORCONTROLS(P.100)

DIGITAL CLOCK(P.102)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROL(P.110)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P.125)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P.180)

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE/FUEL FILL DOOR(P.80, 178)

DOOR LOCKSWITCH(P.75)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.97)

Page 56: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Indicator Lights

TRACTION CONTROLSYSTEM INDICATOR(P. 56)

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR (P. 58)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 55)

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR(P. 58)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR* (P. 55)

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR*(P. 55)

SIDE AIRBAG INDICATOR(P. 55)

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMINDICATOR(P. 56)

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P. 309)

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 310)

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P. 311)

LOW FUELINDICATOR(P. 58)

SEAT BELT REMINDERLIGHT (P. 54)

DOOR AND BRAKE LAMP MONITOR (P. 56)

* The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instruments and Controls

TRACTION CONTROLSYSTEM INDICATOR(P. 56)

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR (P. 58)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 55)

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR(P. 58)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR* (P. 55)

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR*(P. 55)

SIDE AIRBAG INDICATOR(P. 55)

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMINDICATOR(P. 56)

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P. 309)

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 310)

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P. 311)

LOW FUELINDICATOR(P. 58)

SEAT BELT REMINDERLIGHT (P. 54)

DOOR AND BRAKE LAMP MONITOR (P. 56)

Page 57: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Indicator Lights

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your car.

Seat Belt Reminder Light

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

Low Oil PressureIndicator

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page 309 .

Charging SystemIndicator

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page 310 .

Instruments and Controls

Page 58: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Indicator Lights

U.S. Parking Brake andBrake System Indicator

1. This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

2. If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page 313 .

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags or automatic seatbelt tensioners. This light willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags. For completeinformation, see page 47.

Side Airbag Indicator

Only on models equipped with sideairbagsThis indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger's sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page47.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

See page 311.

U.S. Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Only on models equipped with ABS (seepage 204)This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thecar to your dealer to have it checked.With the light on, your car still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock. For complete information, seepage 205.

Instruments and Controls

Canada

S R S

SIDEAIRBAG

A B SCanada

Page 59: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Indicator Lights

Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator

On all V6 modelsThis indicator has three functions:

1. It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the TractionControl System.

2. It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

3. If it comes on and stays on whenthe Traction Control System is on,it indicates that there is a problemin the TCS.

This light also comes on when youturn the ignition ON (II) and goes offafter the engine starts. See page206 for more information on theTCS.

Door and Brake Lamp Monitor

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the trunk or any dooris not closed tightly. If a brake lightdoes not work, the BRAKE LAMPindicator comes on when you pushthe brake pedal with the ignitionswitch ON (II).

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

All the lights in the monitor displaycome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch ON (II).

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page 277 ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signalling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the car should flash.

Instruments and Controls

TCS

Page 60: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Indicator Lights

"Daytime RunningLights" Indicator

Canadian models onlyThis indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

High Beam Indicator

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page 60 forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page 63 ).

Cruise Control Indicator

Only on models equipped with CruiseControl SystemThis lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page 68 for informationon operating the cruise control.

Low Fuel Indicator

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage 72 ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

Washer Level Indicator

Canadian models onlyThis light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page 246 ).

Instruments and Controls

CRUISECONTROLDRL

Page 61: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Gauges

SpeedometerU.S. ModelsThis shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

Canadian ModelsThis shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

TachometerThe tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

OdometerThe odometer shows the total dis-tance your car has been driven. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

Instruments and Controls

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TRIP METERRESET BUTTON

ODOMETERTRIP METERMAINTENANCEREQUIRED INDICATOR

Page 62: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Gauges

Trip MeterThis meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the Select/Reset button repeatedly. Each tripmeter works independently, so youcan keep track of two differentdistances.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to"0.0". Both trip meters will reset ifthe vehicle's battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

Temperature GaugeThis shows the temperature of theengine's coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to nearthe upper grey zone. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page 239 forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine's coolingsystem.

Fuel GaugeThis shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the car is onlevel ground. It may show slightlymore or less than the actual amountwhen you are driving on curvy orhilly roads.

4-cylinder modelsThe gauge stays at the same fuellevel reading after you turn off theignition. When you add fuel, thegauge slowly changes to the newreading after you turn the ignitionswitch back ON (II).

6-cylinder modelsThe needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

Instruments and Controls

Page 63: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Gauges

Maintenance Required Indicator

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your car in forscheduled maintenance.Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages 224 — 228.

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Press and hold the select/resetbutton in the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

3. Hold the buttons for about ten sec-onds, until the indicator resets.

Instruments and Controls

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

SELECT/RESET BUTTON

Page 64: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The controls under the left air ventare for the moonroof and the cruisecontrol.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

* To use the horn, press the padaround the " H " logo.

Instruments and Controls

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS(P. 63)

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS(P. 64, 65, 66)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER(P. 66)

MOONROOFSWITCH(P. 98)

TRACTIONCONTROLSYSTEM(P. 206)

CRUISECONTROL(P. 68)

TILT ADJUSTMENT(P. 67)

HORN*(P. 61)

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS(P. 66)

CRUISECONTROLS(P. 68)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS (P. 70)(on EX with leather and EX-V6 models)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P. 62, 64)

Page 65: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Headlights

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to theposition turns on the headlights.

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver's door.

To change between low beams andhigh beams, pull the turn signal leveruntil you hear a click, then let go.The blue high beam indicator willlight (see page 58).

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

Instruments and Controls

Page 66: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Automatic Lighting Off FeatureOn EX and EX-V6 modelsThe Automatic Lighting Off featureturns off the headlights, parkinglights, taillights, side marker lights,license plate lights and instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver's door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in theor position, remove the key,open, then close the driver's door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter ten minutes.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver's door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver's door

open, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.

Instruments and Controls

Page 67: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Turn Signals

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

Windshield Wipers

The right lever controls the wind-shield wipers and washers. Therotary switch at the end of the leverhas three positions:

INT : intermittent: low speed: high speed

Instruments and Controls

TURN SIGNAL LEVER

Page 68: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. The sweepinterval will change slightly withspeed; getting shorter as you drivefaster. In low speed and high speed,the wipers run continuously.

On all models except DXYou can vary how often the wiperssweep the windshield by turning theINT TIME ring next to the rotaryswitch.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever down. Thewipers run at high speed until yourelease the lever. This gives you aquick way to clear the windshield.

Instruments and Controls

Page 69: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Windshield Washers

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you'repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

Hazard Warning

Push the button to the left of theclock to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your car is disabled.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light abovethe button lights to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the car.

Instruments and Controls

Page 70: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentSee page 16 for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

1. Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

2. Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

3. Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

4. Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Instruments and Controls

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thecar and be seriously injured in acrash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the car is stopped.

Page 71: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Steering Wheel Controls

Cruise ControlExcept for DX model in the U.S.Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the car underthose conditions.

Using the Cruise Control

1. Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

2. Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Instruments and Controls

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

RESUME/accel

CANCEL

SET/decel

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH

Page 72: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Steering Wheel Controls

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Changing the Set SpeedYou can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The car will acceler-ate. When you reach the desiredcruising speed, release the button.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button repeatedly. Each timeyou do this, your car will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The vehicle will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your car will slow downabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/decel button.The car will then maintain thedesired speed.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The carwill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 73: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Steering Wheel Controls

Cancelling the Cruise ControlYou can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, theCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out and thecar will begin to slow down. You canuse the accelerator pedal in thenormal way.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h) and thenpress and release the RESUME/accel button. The CRUISE

CONTROL light comes on. The carwill accelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to Using theCruise Control.

Remote Audio Controls

On EX model with leather interior andEX-V6 modelsThese buttons let you control somefunctions of the audio system with-out removing your hands from thewheel. Refer to page 173 for a com-plete explanation.

Instruments and Controls

AUDIO/CHBUTTON

Page 74: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

Keys

Your car comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.The master key fits all the locks onyour car:

IgnitionDoorsTrunkGlove boxTrunk release handleTrunk pass-through coverRear seat trunk access

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk, trunk release handle,trunk pass-through cover, rear seattrunk access and glove box lockedwhen you leave your car and thevalet key at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber plate with your keys. Youwill need this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe plate stored in a safe place. If youneed to replace a key, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Remote TransmitterSome models also come with tworemote transmitters; see page 76 foran explanation of their operation.

Instruments and Controls

KEYNUMBERPLATE

MASTERKEY(BLACK)

VALET KEY(GREY)

Page 75: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

Immobilizer SystemThe Immobilizer System protectsyour car from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine's fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey's coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourvehicle's key and the ignitionswitch while trying to start theengine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

This indicator will also blink severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour car undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourHonda dealer.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Instruments and Controls

Page 76: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

Ignition Switch

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:

LOCK (0)ACCESSORY (I)ON (II)START (III)

LOCK (0) — You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. If your car hasan automatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in Park. The anti-theft lock will lock the steeringcolumn when you remove the key.If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Page 77: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

ACCESSORY (I) — In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power socket.

ON (II) — This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the car are usable.Several of the lights on the instru-ment panel come on as a test whenyou turn the ignition switch fromACCESSORY to ON.

START (I I I ) — Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key's coding (see page72).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver's door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

Door Locks

Each door has a lock tab on the top.Push the tab down to lock the doorand pull it up to unlock.

Instruments and Controls

LOCK TAB

Page 78: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

To lock any passenger's door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab down and close the door. To lockthe driver's door, pull the outsidedoor handle and push the lock tabdown. Release the handle, then closethe door.

The front doors can be locked andunlocked from the outside with thekey.

Power Door Locks

On all models except DXEach front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the switchdown to lock all doors, and up tounlock them.

To lock any passenger's door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab in and close the door. To lock thedriver's door, pull the outside doorhandle and push the lock tab in orpush the master switch down.Release the handle, then close thedoor.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in eitherfront door. To unlock only the driver'sdoor from the outside, insert the keyin the driver's door lock, turn the keyand release it. If you turn the keyand hold it, all doors will unlock. Allfour doors will unlock when youunlock the passenger's door with thekey.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Page 79: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

Lockout PreventionIf you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver'sdoor. With the driver's door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver'sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger's door will lock alldoors. If you try to lock an opendriver's door by pushing in the locktab, the tabs on all doors pop out.Pushing in the lock tab on thepassenger's door only locks that door.

Remote Transmitter

On EX and EX-V6 modelsYou can lock and unlock your carwith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, all doorslock. The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash once.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver's door unlocks.The remaining doors unlock whenyou push the button a second time.The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash twice.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany door, the light stays on for about10 seconds, then fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 10 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

Instruments and Controls

LED LOCKBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

Page 80: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

You cannot lock or unlock the doorswith the remote transmitter if anydoor is not fully closed or the key isin the ignition switch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 20 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system sets.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou have locked the doors, the hornwill sound once to verify that thesecurity system will be set.

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for approximatelyone second.

The trunk will not open if the key isin the ignition switch.

Panic ModePanic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your car's security system toattract attention. When activated, thehorn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash, for about 30 seconds.To activate panic mode, press andhold the PANIC button for about twoseconds.

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 81: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

Replacing the BatteryWhen the remote transmitter'sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors, and theLED will not light. Replace thebattery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, pry the twoparts of the transmitter apart.

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same (+ sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

Instruments and Controls

BATTERY

Page 82: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Transmitter CareAvoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your car's system byyour Honda dealer. Any othertransmitters you have will also needto be reprogrammed.

Instruments and Controls

Page 83: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

Childproof Door Locks

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

Trunk

You can open the trunk in threeways:

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver's seat.Use the master key to open thetrunk lock. The valet key does notwork in this lock.Press the trunk release button onthe remote transmitter.(EX and EX-V6 models only)

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page 190 for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See CarbonMonoxide Hazard on page 49.

Instruments and Controls

LEVER

MASTER KEYTRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

Page 84: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

1. Lock the trunk release handlewith the master key. Also makesure the trunk pass-through coveris locked (see page 95).

2. Give the person the valet key.

Emergency Trunk Opener

US model only

As a safety feature, your car has arelease lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from inside.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page 19.

Instruments and Controls

MASTER KEY

Page 85: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Keys and Locks

Glove Box

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the instrument panel lights areon.

Instruments and Controls

GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Page 86: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

HomeLink Universal Transmitter

On all V6 modelsThe HomeLink UniversalTransmitter built into your car canbe programmed to operate remotely-controlled devices around your home,such as garage doors, lighting, orhome security systems. It canreplace up to three remotetransmitters.

Customer AssistanceIf you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink UniversalTransmitter, or would likeinformation on home products thatcan be operated by the transmitter,call (800) 355-3515. On the Internet,go to www.homelink.jci.com.

Important Safety PrecautionsAlways refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transmitter. If you do nothave this information, you shouldcontact the manufacturer of theequipment.

While training or using thetransmitter, make sure you have aclear view of the garage door or gate,and that no one will be injured by itsmovement.

General InformationIf you are training the transmitter tooperate a garage door or gate, it isrecommended that you unplug themotor for that device during training.Repeatedly pressing the remotecontrol button could burn out themotor.

The HomeLink transmitter storesthe code in a permanent memory.There should be no need to retrainthe transmitter if your car's batterygoes dead or is disconnected.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to program theHomeLink Universal Transmitter tooperate it. Garage door openersmanufactured before that date donot have a safety feature that causesthem to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury. If youhave questions, call (800) 355-3515.

Instruments and Controls

Page 87: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

HomeLink Universal Transmitter

Training the TransmitterBefore you can use the HomeLinkUniversal Transmitter to operatedevices around your home, it must"learn" the proper codes. Forexample, to train the transmitter toopen and close the garage door:

Before you begin — If you just tookdelivery of your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons in theHomeLink transmitter before, youshould erase any previously learnedcodes before training the first button.To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransmitter for about 20 secondsuntil the red light flashes. Releasethe buttons, then proceed to Step 1.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

1. Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

2. Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from the HomeLinktransmitter. Make sure you arenot blocking your view of the redlight in the transmitter.

3. Select the transmitter button youwant to train.

4. Press the button on the remotecontrol and the button on thetransmitter at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

Instruments and Controls

Page 88: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

HomeLink Universal Transmitter

Canadian Owners:The remote control you are trainingfrom may stop transmitting after twoseconds. This is not long enough forthe HomeLink transmitter to learnthe code. Release and press thebutton on the remote control everytwo seconds until the transmitter haslearned the code.

5. The red light in the transmittershould begin flashing. It will flashslowly at first, then rapidly.

6. When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. Thetransmitter should have learnedthe code from the remote control.

7. Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the transmitterbutton by pushing it. It shouldoperate the garage door.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If it

still does not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. Test this by pressingand holding the HomeLinktransmitter button you just trained.If the red light blinks for twoseconds, then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.You may be able to verify this withthe manufacturer's documentation.Go to "Training With a RollingCode System."

8. Repeat these steps to train theother two transmitter buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

Training With a Rolling CodeSystemFor security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a "rolling"or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed before theHomeLink transmitter can operatethe garage door opener.

The "Training the Transmitter"procedure trains the HomeLinktransmitter to the proper garagedoor opener code. The followingprocedure synchronizes theHomeLink transmitter to the garagedoor opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 89: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

HomeLink Universal Transmitter

It may be helpful to have someoneassist you with this procedure.

1. Make sure you have properlycompleted the "Training theTransmitter" procedure.

2. Find the "Training" button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer. Themanufacturer's documentationmay help.

3. Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

4. Press and release the button onthe HomeLink transmitter. (Thesame button you trained with the"Training the Transmitter"procedure.)

5. Press and release the HomeLinktransmitter button again. Thisshould turn off the training lighton the garage door opener unit.(Some systems may require you topress and release the button up tothree times.)

6. Press the transmitter button again.It should operate the garage door.

Instruments and Controls

TRAINING BUTTON

Page 90: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

HomeLink Universal Transmitter

Retraining a ButtonTo train an already programmedtransmitter button to operate a newdevice:

1. Select the transmitter button youwant to train.

2. Press and hold the transmitterbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

3. While continuing to hold thetransmitter button, place theremote control for the device 2 to5 inches from the HomeLinktransmitter.

4. Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

5. Release both buttons. Thetransmitter should now be trainedto operate the device.

Erasing CodesTo erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the car.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Instruments and Controls

Page 91: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Seat Adjustments

All V-6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior have apower adjustable driver's seat.

The EX-V6 model also has a poweradjustable passenger's seat (Seepage 92 ).

The 4-cylinder EX model withoutleather interior has a power seatbottom height adjustment. All otherseat adjustments in this model aremanual.

The 4-cylinder DX, LX models havemanual seat adjustments (see nextcolumn).

The front passenger's seat in all4-cylinder models and the LX-V6model adjusts manually.

Front Seat Adjustments

See pages 12 — 13 for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.Adjust the seat before you startdriving.To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion's front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the lever on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Move the seat-backto the desired position and releasethe lever. Let the seat-back latch inthe new position.

Instruments and Controls

Page 92: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Seat Adjustments

Driver's Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

On LX modelThe height of your driver's seat isadjustable. Turn the front dial on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe front of the seat bottom and turnthe rear dial to raise the rear.

Driver's Seat Power HeightAdjustment

On EX model without leatherThe height of your driver's seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

Instruments and Controls

Page 93: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Seat Adjustments

Driver's Seat Full PowerAdjustmentsOn all V-6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interiorSee pages 12 — 13 for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.The two power seat adjustmentswitches are on the outside edge ofthe seat bottom. The horizontalswitch adjusts the seat bottom inseveral directions. The short verticalswitch adjusts the seat-back angle.

You can adjust the seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall adjustments before you startdriving.

Push the horizontal switch forwardor backward to move the seatforward or backward.

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom'sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.

Instruments and Controls

Page 94: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Seat Adjustments

Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move.

Driver's Lumbar Support

On EX and EX V-6 modelsVary the lumbar support by movingthe lever on the right side of theseat-back. Pivot the lever forwarduntil it stops, then let it return. Doingthis several times adjusts the lumbarsupport through its full range.

Instruments and Controls

Page 95: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Seat Adjustments

Front Passenger's SeatAdjustments

On EX-V6 modelThe seat adjustment switches are onthe outside edge of the seat bottom.Push the long horizontal switchforward or backward to move theseat bottom in that direction.Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the vertical switch in thedirection you want to move.

Head Restraints

See page 14 for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant's head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

The front head restraints adjust forheight. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. Do not attemptto adjust it while driving. To raise it,pull upward. To lower the restraint,push the release button sidewaysand push the restraint down.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Instruments and Controls

RELEASE BUTTON

Page 96: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Seat Adjustments

Folding Rear Seat

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back can be released frominside the car or inside the trunk.

To fold down the seat-back frominside the car, insert the master keyin the lock on the rear shelf. Turnthe key clockwise, pull down the topof the seat-back, then release thekey.

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release loop underthe trunk panel.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

MASTER KEY

Page 97: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Seat Adjustments

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See Carrying Cargo on page188.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See Carbon Monoxide Hazard onpage 49.

Rear Seat ArmrestOn all models except DX

The rear seat armrest is located atthe center of the rear seat. Pivot itdown to use it.

Instruments and Controls

Page 98: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Seat Adjustments

Trunk Pass-through Cover

The pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See Carbon Monoxide Hazard onpage 49.

Instruments and Controls

KNOB

LID

Page 99: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Seat Heaters

On Canadian EX-V6 model and EXmodel with leather interiorBoth front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition must beON (II) to use them. Push the rightside of the switch, HI, to rapidly heatup the seat. After the seat reaches acomfortable temperature, select LOby pushing the left side of the switch.This will keep the seat warm.

The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off bypushing the opposite side of theswitch lightly. The indicator will turnoff.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seats temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe passenger's seat-back.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Instruments and Controls

Page 100: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Power Windows

On all models except DXYour car's windows are electrically-powered. Turn the ignition switch toON (II) to raise or lower any window.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pushing the switch upand holding it. DRIVER'S WINDOW

SWITCHMAINSWITCH

The driver's door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any of the passengers' win-dows, push down on the appropriateswitch and hold it down until thewindow reaches the desired position.To close the window, pull back onthe window switch. Release theswitch when the window gets to theposition you want.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Closing a power window onsomeone's hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Page 101: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Power Windows, Moonroof

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

AUTO — To open the driver'swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down and release it.The window automatically goes allthe way down. To stop the windowfrom going all the way down, pullback on the window switch briefly.

To open the driver's window onlypartially, push the window switchdown lightly and hold it. The windowwill stop as soon as you release theswitch.

The AUTO function only works tolower the driver's window. To raisethe window, you must pull back onthe window switch and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passengers' windows. With thisswitch off, the passengers' windowscannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect thedriver's window. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe car so they do not injure them-selves by operating the windowsunintentionally.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch ON (II) againbefore you can raise or lower thewindows.

Moonroof

MOONROOF SWITCH

On EX and EX V-6 modelsThe moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II).

Instruments and Controls

Page 102: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Moonroof, Mirrors

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the top of the switch( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the bottom of theswitch ( ).Release the switchwhen the moonroof gets to thedesired position. Make sureeveryone's hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to ten minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither front door. You must thenturn the ignition ON (II) for themoonroof to operate.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-freezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Instruments and Controls

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone's handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

TABNOTICE

CONTINUED

Page 103: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

On all models except DXAdjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the driver'sdoor armrest:

1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

2. Move the selector switch to L(driver's side) or R (passenger'sside).

3. Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up or down.

4. When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can'tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Instruments and Controls

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Page 104: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Mirrors, Parking Brake

On all Canadian models except DXmodelThe outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Parking Brake

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased with the engine running(see page 55).

Driving the car with the parking brakeapplied can damage the rear brakesand axles.

Instruments and Controls

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

NOTICE

Page 105: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Digital Clock

The digital clock displays the timewith the ignition switch in anyposition.To set the clock:

1. Press and hold the H button untilthe hour advances to the desiredtime.

2. Press and hold the M button untilthe numbers advance to thedesired time.

You can use R to quickly set the timeto the nearest hour. If the displayedtime is before the half hour, pressingR sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.For example:

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

Instruments and Controls

H M R

Page 106: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Console Compartment, Coin Box

Console Compartment

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lower lever and lift thelid.

To close, lower the lid and push itdown until it latches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theupper lever and lift up the armrestpad.

Coin Box

The coin box is located under the air-vent. To open the coin box, pull thebottom edge. Close it with a firmpush.

Instruments and Controls

COIN BOXCONSOLE COMPARTMENT

LEVER LEVER

Page 107: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Beverage Holder

To open the beverage holder, pushon the top. The beverage holder lidis spring-loaded and will swing open.To close it, push it down until itlatches.

The inner liner can be removed ifyou want to hold a larger cup.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

On all models except DX modelThe rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

Instruments and Controls

Push

Page 108: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window. In thisposition, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the car. Do not use thesun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

Vanity Mirror

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

All models except the DX modelhave lighted vanity mirrors.

The light beside the mirror comeson only when the headlight switch isin one of the on positions.

Instruments and Controls

Page 109: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Sunglasses Holder, Accessory Power Socket

Sunglasses Holder

On all models except DXTo open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

Accessory Power Socket

To use the accessory power socket,pull out on the cover. The ignitionswitch must be in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II).

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

It will not power an automotive typecigarette lighter element.

Instruments and Controls

Page 110: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Interior Lights

Ceiling Light

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open any door.

DX, LX, LX-V6The light goes out when all doors areclosed.

EX, EX-V6After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 10 seconds. In the ON position,the ceiling light stays oncontinuously.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also conies onwhen you unlock the door with theremote transmitter (see page 74).The light fades out after both doorsare closed.

Spotlights

On all models except DXTurn on the spotlight by pushing thebutton next to each light. Push thebutton again to turn it off. You canuse the spotlights at all times.

Instruments and Controls

DOOR ACTIVATED

Page 111: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Interior Lights

Courtesy Lights

On all models except DXEach door has a courtesy light. Thislight comes on when you open thedoor.

Your car also has a courtesy light inthe ignition switch. This light comeson when you open the driver's door.It remains on for several secondsafter the door is closed.

Instruments and Controls

DOOR LIGHT

IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT

Page 112: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Comfort and Convenience Features

The heating and air conditioning*systems in your Honda provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

* Air conditioning is optional on theU.S. DX model.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them. (If you selected anoptional audio system, refer to theoperating instructions that camewith it.)

On EX and EX-V6 modelsThe security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourHonda.

Heating and Cooling...................... 110What Each Control Does.......... 110

How to Use the System............. 113To Turn Everything Off........... 116

Climate Control System................ 117Fully-automatic Operation........ 119Semi-automatic Operation........ 120Sunlight Sensor/

Temperature Sensor............. 124Audio System (DX)....................... 125

Operating the Radio.................. 126Adjusting the Sound.................. 129Operating the Cassette

Player...................................... 130Caring for Cassettes.................. 132Operating the Optional CD

Changer.................................. 133Protecting Compact Discs........ 135CD Changer Error

Indications.............................. 136Audio System (LX and LX-V6)..... 137

Operating the Radio.................. 137Adjusting the Sound.................. 141Operating the CD Player.......... 142Operating the CD Changer...... 144CD player Error

Indications.............................. 146

CD Changer ErrorIndications.............................. 147

Operating the CassettePlayer...................................... 148

Tape Search Functions............. 150Caring for the Cassette

Player...................................... 151Audio System (EX and EX-V6).... 153

Operating the Radio.................. 154Adjusting the Sound.................. 157Audio System Lighting............. 158Radio Frequencies..................... 158Radio Reception......................... 158Operating the Cassette

Player...................................... 160Tape Search Functions............. 161Caring for the Cassette

Player...................................... 164Operating the CD Changer...... 165Protecting Compact Discs........ 171CD Changer Error

Indications.............................. 172Remote Audio Controls ............ 173Theft Protection........................ 174

Security System............................. 175

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 113: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Heating and Cooling

Except EX-V6 modelProper use of the Heating andCooling system can make theinterior dry and comfortable, andkeep the windows clear for bestvisibility.

If your car does not have airconditioning, it can be installed atany time. Your dealer can install aGenuine Honda air conditioningsystem that meets Honda's highquality standards and is designed toexactly fit your car. Please contactyour dealer for more information.

What Each Control Does

Fan Control DialTurning this dial clockwise increasesthe fan's speed, which increases airflow.

Temperature Control DialTurning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

Air Conditioning (A/C) ButtonAir Conditioning is optional on theU.S. DX model.This button turns the air condi-tioning ON and OFF. The indicatorabove the button lights when theA/C is on.

Rear Window Defogger ButtonThis button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page 66).

Recirculation ButtonThis button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the car's interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).

Comfort and Convenience Features

FAN CONTROL DIAL MODE BUTTONS TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

Page 114: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Heating and Cooling

Mode ButtonsUse the MODE buttons to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.When you select orthe system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 115: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Heating and Cooling

Vent Controls

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust the air flow from thecenter vent, move the tab up-and-down and side-to-side.

DRIVER'S-SIDE VENT

On the driver's-side vent, move thevent up-and-down and move the tabside-to-side. On the passenger's-sidevent, move the tab up-and-down andmove the vent side-to-side.

PASSENGER'S-SIDE VENT

The vents in the corners of thedashboard can be opened and closedwith the dials underneath them.

Comfort and Convenience Features

CENTER VENT

Page 116: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Heating and Cooling

How to Use the SystemThis section covers how to set up thesystem controls for ventilation,heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anddefrosting.

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.The air conditioning does not rely onengine temperature.

It is best to leave the system in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whenyou are driving through smoky ordusty conditions, then switch back toFresh Air mode when the conditionclears.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keepthese clear of leaves and otherdebris.

VentilationThe flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

1. Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.

2. Select and Fresh Air mode.3. Set the fan to the desired speed.

Comfort and Convenience Features

FAN CONTROL DIAL MODE BUTTONS TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

CONTINUED

Page 117: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the

button. The light above the buttonshould come on when a fan speedis selected.

2. Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is set to maximum cool.

3. Select4. If the outside air is humid, select

Recirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.

5. Set the fan to the desired speed.

If the interior is very warm frombeing parked in the sun, you can coolit down more rapidly by setting upthe controls this way:

1. Start the engine.2. Turn on the A/C by pressing the

button. Make sure the tempera-ture control dial is set to maximumcool.

3. Set the fan to maximum speed.4. Open the windows partially. Select

and Fresh Air mode.

When the interior has cooled downto a more comfortable temperature,close the windows and set thecontrols as described for normalcooling.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page58) when driving in stop-and-go

traffic or climbing a long, steep hill.If it moves near the red zone, turnoff the A/C until the gauge readsnormally.

Comfort and Convenience Features

FAN CONTROL DIAL MODE BUTTONS TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTONRECIRCULATION BUTTON

Page 118: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Heating and Cooling

To HeatTo warm the interior:

1. Start the engine.2. Select and Fresh Air mode.3. Set the fan to the desired speed.4. Adjust the warmth of the air with

the temperature control dial.

To Heat and Dehumidify with AirConditioningAir conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

1. Switch the fan on.2. Turn on the air conditioning.3. Select and Fresh Air mode.4. Adjust the temperature control

dial so the mixture of heated andcooled air feels comfortable.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To Defog and DefrostTo remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

1. Switch the fan on.2. Select

When you select thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

3. Adjust the temperature controldial so the air flow from thedefroster vents feels warm.

4. Turn on the rear window defoggerto help clear the rear window.

When you switch to another modefrom the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 119: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Heating and Cooling

To remove exterior frost or ice fromthe windshield and side windowsafter the car has been sitting out incold weather:

1. Start the engine.2. Select

When you select thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

3. Switch the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost orice from the windshield (on very colddays), first select the Recirculationmode. Once the windshield is clear,select the Fresh Air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

These settings direct all the air flowto the defroster vents at the base ofthe windshield and the side windowdefroster vents. The air flow will getwarmer and clear the windows fasteras the engine warms up. You canclose the side vents with the dialunderneath each vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents.

For safety, make sure you have aclear view through all the windowsbefore driving away.

To Turn Everything OffTo shut off the system temporarily,turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left.

You should shut the systemcompletely off only for the first fewminutes of driving in cold weather,until the engine coolant warms upenough to operate the heater. Keepthe fan on at all other times so staleair does not build up in the interior.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 120: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Climate Control System

Only on EX-V6 modelThe automatic climate controlsystem in your Honda picks theproper combination of air condi-tioning, heating, and ventilation tomaintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

CENTER VENTS

To adjust the air flow from thecenter vent, move the tab up-and-down and side-to-side.

DRIVER'S-SIDE VENT

On the driver's-side vent, move thevent up-and-down and move the tabside-to-side. On the passenger's-sidevent, move the tab up-and-down andmove the vent side-to-side.

The side vents can be opened andclosed with the dials underneaththem.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 121: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Climate Control System

PASSENGER'S-SIDE VENT

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 122: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Climate Control System

Fully-automatic OperationTo put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button and set thefan control dial to AUTO, then setthe desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial. You willsee FULL AUTO in the system'sdisplay. The light above the

button also shows you whichmode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, isselected.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.When the temperature is set

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

FULL AUTODISPLAY

FAN CONTROL DIAL

AUTO BUTTON OFF BUTTON

between the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until the carhas been driven for a short time andthe heater starts to develop warm air.

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 123: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Climate Control System

Semi-automatic OperationYou can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL to go out.

Air Conditioning (A/C) ButtonPress the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

Comfort and Convenience Features

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

Page 124: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Climate Control System

Recirculation ButtonThis button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the car's interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

Fan Control DialYou can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan control dial.When you turn the dial clockwise,the fan is taken out of automaticmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Turning the dial fullyclockwise increases the fan's speed,which increases air flow.

MODE BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

Mode ButtonUse the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes. Each time youpress the MODE button, the displayshows the mode selected. Press thebutton four times to see all themodes.

Some air will come out of the sidevents in all modes.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

FAN CONTROL DIAL

Page 125: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Climate Control System

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 126: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Climate Control System

The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

Rear Window Defogger ButtonThis button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page 66 ).

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 127: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Climate Control System

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 128: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

AM/FM/Cassette Stereo AudioSystemFor DX modelYour Honda's audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The cassette system features DolbyB* noise reduction, automaticsensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO2)tape, and autoreverse for continuousplay.

* Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. "DOLBY" and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 129: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Operating the RadioThe ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob.Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

TUNE — Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the upper part ( ) to tuneto a higher frequency, or the lowerpart ( ) to tune to a lowerfrequency. The frequency numberswill start to change rapidly. Releasethe bar when the display reaches thedesired frequency. To change thefrequency in small increments, pressand release the TUNE bar quickly.

SEEK — The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pushthe SEEK switch up or down, thenrelease it. Depending on which wayyou push the switch, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 130: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

SCAN — The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. The system will scanup the band for a station with astrong signal. When it finds one, itwill stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

AM/FMBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

SEEK SWITCH TUNE BAR

Page 131: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Preset — You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

2. Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

3. Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

AM/FM BUTTON

SEEK SWITCH

Once a station's frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car's battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Comfort and Convenience Features

PRESETBUTTONS

TUNE BAR

Page 132: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader — These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Treble/Bass — Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

Radio Frequencies and ReceptionFor information, See page 158.

Comfort and Convenience Features

BASS/FADERCONTROL

TREBLE/BALANCECONTROL

Page 133: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Operating the Cassette PlayerTurn the audio system ON. Makesure the tape opening on the cassetteis facing to the right, then insert thecassette most of the way into the slot.The system will pull it in the rest ofthe way, and begin to play.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby B noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a cassette. If thetape was not recorded with Dolby Bnoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the button.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

Tape Search FunctionsWith a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

FF/REW — Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

SKIP — The Skip Function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To find the beginning ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, push the SKIP switch down.You will see REW flashing in thedisplay as the tape rewinds. To findthe beginning of the next song, pushthe SKIP switch up. You will see FFflashing in the display as the tapefast forwards. When the systemfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, it goes back to PLAY mode.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 134: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

REPEAT — The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

EJECT BUTTON CASSETTE SLOT TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

FFBUTTON

REWBUTTON

RPT BUTTON

PLAY BUTTON

PROG BUTTON

DOLBY BUTTONSKIP BUTTON

Page 135: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Caring for CassettesDamaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page 151 for information oncassette care and protection.

Comfort and Convenience Features

EJECT BUTTON CASSETTE SLOT TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

REWBUTTON

FFBUTTON

RPT BUTTON

PLAY BUTTON

PROG BUTTON

DOLBY BUTTONSKIP BUTTON

Page 136: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Operating the Optional CDChangerA Compact Disc changer is availablefrom your dealer. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate the CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.

Your dealer also has an accessory in-dash single CD player available thatis operated by the radio controls. Tooperate this unit, use the instructions(except for those relating to multiplediscs) in this section.

Using the instructions that camewith the changer, load the desiredCDs in the magazine, and load themagazine in the changer. Play onlystandard round discs. Odd-shapedCDs may jam in the drive or causeother problems.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

TAPE/CD BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

RANDOM INDICATOR

REPEAT INDICATOR

PWR/VOL KNOB

RPT BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS

SKIP SWITCH

Page 137: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

To operate the CD changer or player,the ignition must be in ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) and the audio systemmust be on.

Press the CD button until "CD"appears in the display. The systemwill start to play the first track of thefirst disc in the magazine. Play onlystandard round discs. Odd-shapedCDs may jam in the drive or causeother problems.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe magazine is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 — 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

You can use the SKIP switch toselect tracks within a disc. If youpush and release the SKIP switch,the system will move to thebeginning of a track. Push the switchup to move to the beginning of thenext track, and push the switchdown to move to the beginning ofthe current track.

If you push and hold the SKIP switch,you will hear a beep and the systemwill continue to move across tracks.Release the switch when you think ithas reached the desired place on thedisc.

REPEAT — When you activate theRepeat feature by pressing the RPTbutton, the system continuouslyreplays the current track. You willsee RPT in the display as a reminder.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

RANDOM PLAY — This feature,when activated, plays the tracks on aCD in random order, rather than inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand hold the RPT button until yousee RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play tracksrandomly on the current disc. Whenall tracks on that disc have beenplayed, the next disc is loaded andplayed randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing RPT again.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 138: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

If the system is in Repeat mode, youmust turn it off by pressing RPTbefore you can select Random Play.Then press the button again untilyou see RDM displayed.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or insert acassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode, play will continue at thesame disc and track.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same disc and trackwhen you turn it back on.

Protecting Compact DiscsFor information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page171.

Comfort and Convenience Features

AM/FM BUTTON

TAPE/CD BUTTON

RANDOM INDICATOR

REPEAT INDICATOR

PRESET BUTTONS

RPT BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SKIP SWITCH

Page 139: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

CD Changer Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 140: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

AM/FM/CD Audio SystemFor LX modelYour Honda's audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thevehicle's battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page 174 ).

Operating the RadioThe ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 141: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the Preset buttons.

TUNE — Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob clockwise to tune to ahigher frequency, orcounterclockwise to tune to a lowerfrequency.

To change the frequency rapidly,press and hold the top or bottom ofthe SEEK bar. Release the bar whenthe display reaches the desiredfrequency. Depending on which partof the bar you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency.

SEEK — The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressand release the top or bottom of theSEEK bar. Depending on which partof the bar you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

SCAN — The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. The system will scanup the band for a station with astrong signal. When it finds one, itwill stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 142: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Preset — You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

3. Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station's frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car's battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Comfort and Convenience Features

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE/MODE KNOB

SCANBUTTON

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR

SCAN INDICATOR

Page 143: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

AUTO SELECT — If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a "0"displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 144: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Adjusting the SoundBass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

Balance/Fader — These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob. The level number onthe display shows you the range.

LEVEL NUMBER INDICATOR

Treble/Bass — Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob. The levelnumber on the display shows you therange.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

Radio Frequencies and ReceptionFor information, See page 158 .

Comfort and Convenience Features

TUNE/MODE KNOB

Page 145: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Audio System LightingYou can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage 62 ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Operating the CD PlayerYou operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insertthe disc into the CD slot. Push thedisc in halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way and begin toplay. The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. Playonly standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play that disc again.

Comfort and Convenience Features

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/TAPE BUTTON REPEAT INDICATOR

CD SLOT REPEAT BUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

RANDOM INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PWR/VOL KNOB

Page 146: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the A M /FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Pressthe side to move forward. Youwill see CUE in the display. Press the

side to move backward. Youwill see REW displayed. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe side to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 147: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

REPEAT — To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

RANDOM PLAY — This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

Operating the CD Changer(Optional)A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your car. It holds up to six discs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

To select a different disc, press theDISC + (Preset 6) or DISC —(Preset 5) button. The next disc inthe changer is loaded and playedwhen you press the DISC + button.DISC — loads and plays the previousdisc. If you select an empty slot inthe magazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 148: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the FM orAM button.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

Protecting Compact DiscsFor information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page171.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 149: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

CD Player Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 150: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

CD Changer Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 151: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Operating the Cassette Player(Optional)The cassette system features DolbyB* noise reduction, automaticsensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO2)tape, and autoreverse for continuousplay.

Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

* Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. "DOLBY" and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

AM/FM BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON

REW BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

Comfort and Convenience Features

FF BUTTON

NR BUTTONCD/TAPE BUTTON

Page 152: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby B noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a cassette. If thetape was not recorded with Dolby Bnoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the NR button.

Dolby remains off until you turn it onby pressing the button again.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton on the cassette player.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe PLAY button.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD button. To changeback to the cassette player, push theCD button.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 153: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Tape Search FunctionsWith a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

FF/REW — Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

SKIP — The skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To activate SKIP, pressthe SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the

side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will flash in thedisplay as the tape moves. When thesystem reaches the beginning of thenext song or passage (FF), or thebeginning of the current one (REW),it goes back to PLAY mode.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 154: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

REPEAT — The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Caring for the Cassette PlayerThe cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 155: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.

If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

If you see the error indicationon the display, press

the EJECT button and remove thecassette from the unit. Make surethe tape is not damaged. If thecassette will not eject or the errorindication stays on after the cassetteejects, take the car to your Hondadealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 156: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

AM/FM/Cassette/CD ChangerAudio SystemFor EX and EX-V6Your Honda's audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The cassette system features DolbyB* noise reduction, automaticsensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO2)tape, and autoreverse for continuousplay.

* Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. "DOLBY" and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page 165 for CDchanger operation.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar's battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page 174 ).

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 157: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Operating the RadioThe ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM or FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

TUNE — Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

SEEK — The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

SCAN — The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. When the system isin the SCAN mode, SCAN shows inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 158: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Preset — You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

2. Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

3. Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

PWR/VOLKNOB

FMBUTTON

TUNE KNOB

SEEKBUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS

Once a station's frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car's battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Comfort and Convenience Features

CONTINUED

AMBUTTON

STEREOINDICATOR

Page 159: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

AUTO SELECT — If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a "0"displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Comfort and Convenience Features

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS

SEEKBUTTONS

A.SEL INDICATOR

A.SELBUTTON

Page 160: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Adjusting the SoundBass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

Treble/Bass — Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob. The levelindicators on the display show youthe range.

Balance/Fader — These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob. The level indicators onthe display show you the range.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

Comfort and Convenience Features

TUNE KNOB

Page 161: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Audio System LightingYou can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage 63 ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Radio FrequenciesYour Honda's radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as "FM101."

Radio ReceptionHow well your Honda's radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station's transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station's signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station's signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio's reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 162: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station's transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 163: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Operating the Cassette PlayerThe ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby B noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a cassette. The

indicator will light in the dis-play. If the tape was not recordedwith Dolby B noise reduction, turn itoff by pressing the button.Dolby remains off until you turn it onby pressing the button again.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

You can remove the cassette withthe ignition switch in any position,even if the audio system is turned off.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM, FM or CD button. Tochange back to the cassette player,press the TAPE button.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 164: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Tape Search FunctionsWith a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

FF/REW — Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Torewind the tape, push the REWbutton. You will see REW in thedisplay. To fast forward the tape,push the FF button. You will see FFdisplayed. Press the FF, REW orPLAY button to take the system outof rewind or fast forward. When thesystem reaches the end of the tape,it reverses direction and begins toplay.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

PWR/VOL KNOB TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

DOLBY INDICATOR

TAPE EJECTBUTTON

CASSETTE SLOT

CDBUTTON

TAPEBUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON

PROG BUTTON FF BUTTON

REW BUTTON

AMBUTTON

FM BUTTON PLAYBUTTON

Page 165: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

SKIP — The skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

To stop the SKIP function before itfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, press either of the SKIPbuttons ( or ).

Comfort and Convenience Features

RPT BUTTON

REPEAT INDICATOR

SKIP BUTTONSFF BUTTON

REW BUTTON

Page 166: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

REPEAT — The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.Pressing the REW or FF button, oreither of the SKIP buttons, also turnsoff REPEAT.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 167: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Caring for the Cassette PlayerThe cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

If you see the error indicationon the display, press the

EJECT button to remove thecassette from the unit. Make surethe tape is not damaged. If thecassette will not eject or the errorindication stays on after the cassetteejects, take the car to your Hondadealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 168: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Operating the CD ChangerYour Honda's audio system has anin-dash CD changer that holds up tosix discs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.

To load the CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT CD EJECT BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

RDM BUTTON CD BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS

REPEAT BUTTON

Page 169: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Loading CDs in the ChangerTo load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

1. Press and hold the Load buttonuntil you hear a beep and see

in the display, thenrelease the button.

2. On the left side of the display, theCD Loaded indicator for an emptyposition will begin blinking.

3. When you see LOAd in the display,insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway, thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will again see the dashesin the display as the CD is loaded.

4. When LOAd appears again in thedisplay, insert the next disc intothe CD slot.

5. Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the Load buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress the Load button, the systemwill wait for ten seconds, then stopthe load operation and begin playingthe last CD loaded.

To load a single CD:

1. Press and release the Load button.

2. When the CD Loaded indicator foran empty position starts to blink,and you see LOAd in the display,insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway, thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway.

3. The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 170: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

If you press the Load button while aCD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate presetbutton. Select an empty position (theCD Loaded indicator is off), andpress the preset button for thatposition (1 to 6). The system willstop playing the current CD and startthe loading sequence. It will thenplay the CD just loaded.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

LOAD BUTTON CD LOADEDINDICATOR

AMBUTTON

CD SLOT

FM BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS TAPE BUTTON

Page 171: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

OperationSelect the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see "Cd" inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate Preset button (1 — 6). Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence (see page 165 ).

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the appropriate SKIPbutton. You will hear a beep and thesystem will continue to move. Pressthe button to move forward, orthe button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

REPEAT — To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either of theSKIP buttons also turns off therepeat feature.

RANDOM PLAY — This feature,when activated, plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate Random Play,press the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent CD with a preset button.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 172: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM or FM button, or inserta cassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode by pressing the CDbutton, play will continue at the samepoint that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

PWR/VOLKNOB

FM BUTTON RDMINDICATOR

RPTINDICATOR

CDBUTTON

AMBUTTON

RDMBUTTON

RPT BUTTON

TAPEBUTTON

SKIPBUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONS

Page 173: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Removing CDs from the ChangerTo remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the Eject button. Youwill see "EJEC" in the display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system automatically begins theLoad sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, after tenseconds the system begins playingthe next disc in the changer. If thechanger is empty, the system selectsthe previous mode (AM, FM, orTape).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after ten seconds and beginplaying it.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatCD begins playing, press the Ejectbutton.

Comfort and Convenience Features

CD SLOT CD EJECT BUTTON

CD BUTTON

Page 174: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Protecting Compact Discs

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, felt-tippens, and labels can cause the CD tonot play properly, or possibly jam inthe drive.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 175: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

CD Changer Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 176: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Remote Audio Controls

On EX model with leather interior andEX-V6 modelTwo controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The top and bottom buttons adjustthe volume up or downPress the proper button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The AUDIO/CH button has threefunctions, depending on whether youare listening to the radio, or playing acassette or CD.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe AUDIO/CH button to changestations. Each time you press thisbutton, the system advances to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. You will see thenumber of the selected Preset buttonin the display. To change bands,press the AM or FM button on theaudio system's front panel.

If you are playing a cassette, use theAUDIO/CH button to advance to thenext selection. You will see "FF"blinking in the display when youpress the AUDIO/CH button. Thesystem fast forwards until it senses asilent period, then goes back toPLAY.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push theAUDIO/CH button. You will see thedisc and track number in the display.

Comfort and Convenience Features

AUDIO/CHBUTTON

Page 177: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Theft ProtectionOn EX, EX-V6 modelsYour car's audio system will disableitself if it is disconnected fromelectrical power for any reason. Tomake it work again, the user mustenter a specific five-digit code in thePreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system's codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system's serial number inthis Owner's Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system's serial number.

If your car's battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the radio fuse isremoved, the audio system willdisable itself. If this happens, youwill see "Code" in the frequencydisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code. If it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 178: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Security System

On EX and EX-V6 modelsThe security system helps to protectyour car and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourcar or remove the radio. This alarmcontinues for two minutes, then thesystem resets. To reset an alarmingsystem before the two minutes haveelapsed, unlock either front doorwith the key or the remotetransmitter.

The security system sets auto-matically fifteen seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and trunk. Forthe system to activate, you must lockthe doors from the outside with thekey, lock tab, door lock switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem light next to the driver's doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), orthe hood, will cause it to alarm. Italso alarms if the radio is removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the trunk lock is forced, orthe trunk is opened with the trunkrelease handle.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Brake LampMonitor on the instrument panel(see page 56), to see if the doorsand trunk are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 179: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

176

Page 180: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your car,please read the information in thissection first.

Break-in Period.............................. 178Gasoline.......................................... 178Service Station Procedures .......... 178

Filling the Fuel Tank................. 178Opening the Hood..................... 180

Oil Check................................ 182Engine Coolant Check.......... 184

Fuel Economy................................ 185Vehicle Condition...................... 185Driving Habits............................ 185

Accessories and Modifications.... 186Carrying Cargo.............................. 188

Before Driving

Page 181: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Break-in Period, Gasoline, Service Station Procedures

Break-in PeriodHelp assure your car's futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

GasolineYour Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical damage.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your car's emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emission control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Honda dealer for service.

Filling the Fuel Tank

1. Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver's side of the car, park withthat side closest to the servicestation pumps.

2. Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver's seat.

Before Driving

Page 182: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Service Station Procedures

3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to "top off" the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Your car has an on-board refuelingvapor recovery system to helpkeep fuel vapors from going intothe atmosphere. If the fuel pumpkeeps clicking off even though thetank is not full, there may be aproblem with this system. Consultyour dealer.

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage 311).

6. Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Before Driving

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Page 183: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Service Station Procedures

Opening the Hood

1. Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

2. Standing in front of the car, putyour fingers under the front edgeof the hood to the right of center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page 256 ).

Before Driving

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH

Page 184: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Service Station Procedures

4-cylinder models3. Pull the support rod out of its clip

and insert the end into the hole onthe front of the hood around thecenter.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

6-cylinder models3. Lift the hood up most of the way.

The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

CONTINUED

Before Driving

SUPPORT ROD

Page 185: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Service Station Procedures

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Oil Check

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the car with fuel. Wait a fewminutes after turning the engine offbefore you check the oil.

1. Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Before Driving

4-cylinder models DIPSTICK 6-cylinder models DIPSTICK

Page 186: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Service Station Procedures

2. Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

3. Insert it all the way back in its tube.

CONTINUED

Before Driving

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

Page 187: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Service Station Procedures

4. Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see Adding Oil on page 234 .

Engine Coolant Check

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see AddingEngine Coolant on page 239 forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer to Owner MaintenanceChecks on page 231 for informationon checking other items in yourHonda.

Before Driving

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

MAXRESERVE TANK

MIN4-cylinder models

RESERVE TANK

6-cylinder models MIN

MAX

Page 188: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Fuel Economy

The condition of your car and yourdriving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Vehicle ConditionAlways maintain your car accordingto the maintenance schedule. Thiswill keep it in top operating condition.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the Owner MaintenanceChecks (see page 231). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more "rolling resistance,"which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour car's underside adds weight androlling resistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage and reducesthe chance of corrosion.

Driving HabitsYou can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your car uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to"warm-up" a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of "cold starts," try tocombine several short trips into one.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

Before Driving

Page 189: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying your car, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your car unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

AccessoriesYour dealer has Genuine Hondaaccessories that allow you topersonalize your car. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your car, and arecovered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your car, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your car'shandling and stability. (See"Modifications" on the page 187 foradditional information.)

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your car'scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour car's electrical system capacity,they can interfere with the operation

of your car, or even cause theairbags to deploy.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper car operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page 315).

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Before Driving

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourcar's handling, stability andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Page 190: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Accessories and Modifications

ModificationsDo not remove any originalequipment or modify your car in anyway that would alter its design oroperation. This could make your carunsafe and illegal to drive.

For example, do not make anymodifications that would change theride height of your car, or installwheels and tires with a differentoverall diameter.

Such modifications can adverselyaffect handling, and interfere withthe operation of the car's anti-lockbrakes and other systems.

In addition, any modifications thatdecrease ground clearance increasethe chance of undercarriage partsstriking a curb, speed bump, or otherraised object, which could causeyour airbags to deploy.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Additional Safety PrecautionDo not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked "SRS AIRBAG," in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

On models equipped with side airbagsDo not attach hard objects on ornear a front door. If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Hondaseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

Before Driving

Page 191: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Carrying Cargo

Your car has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe front doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The trunk is intended for larger,heavier items. In addition, the backseat can be folded down to allow youto carry more cargo or longer items.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour car's handling, stability andoperation and make it unsafe. Beforecarrying any type of cargo, be sure toread the following pages.

Before Driving

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKET GLOVE BOXTRUNK

Page 192: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Carrying Cargo

Load LimitThe maximum load for your car is850 lbs (395 kg).

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

Add up the weight of all occupants.

If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

Subtract the total from 850 Ibs(395 kg).

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around the carduring a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver's ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If the lid is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

Before Driving

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Page 193: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the car during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page 49.

If you can cany any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Hondadealer for further information.

Before Driving

Page 194: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Driving

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed manual and automatictransmissions. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour car, the braking system, andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer.

Preparing to Drive......................... 192Starting the Engine........................ 193

Starting in Cold Weatherat High Altitude ..................... 194

5-speed Manual Transmission..... 195Recommended Shift Points...... 196Engine Speed Limiter ............... 196

Automatic Transmission............... 196Shift Lever Position Indicator.. 197Shift Lever Positions................. 197Engine Speed Limiter............... 200Shift Lock Release..................... 200

Parking............................................ 202The Braking System...................... 203

Brake Wear Indicators.............. 203Brake System Design................ 204Anti-lock Brakes........................ 204

Important SafetyReminders.......................... 205

ABS Indicator......................... 205Traction Control System............... 206

TCS ON/OFF Switch................ 207TCS Indicator............................. 207

Driving in Bad Weather................ 209Towing a Trailer............................ 211

Driving

Page 195: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Preparing to Drive

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your car.

1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

2. Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

3. Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

4. Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat(see page 88).

6. Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage 99).

7. Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page 67).

8. Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

9. Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page 14 ).

10.Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

11.Start the engine (see page 193).

12. Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage 53).

Driving

Page 196: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Starting the Engine

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

3. Manual Transmission:Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Automatic Transmission:Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

4. Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

5. If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

6. If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

Driving

Page 197: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Starting the Engine

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to the problem.Use the following procedure:

1. Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

2. Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

3. If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

Driving

Page 198: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

5-speed Manual Transmission

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the car moving. Pushdown the clutch pedal, and pause fora few seconds before shifting intoReverse, or shift into one of theforward gears for a moment. Thisstops the gears so they won't "grind."

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer's red zone in thelower gear.

Driving

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Page 199: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

5-speed Manual Transmission, Automatic Transmission

Recommended Shift PointsDrive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

Engine Speed LimiterIf you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer'sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out This iscaused by a limiter in the engine'scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer's red zone.

Automatic TransmissionYour Honda's transmission has fourforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a "lock-up" torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

Driving

Page 200: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicator

This indicator between the fuelgauge and temperature gauge showswhich position the shift lever is in.

The "D4" indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapid acceler-ation and have the transmissionchecked by an authorized Hondadealer as soon as possible.

Shift Lever Positions

SHIFT LEVER

The shift lever has seven positions.It must be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD4, D3, 2,1, N or R, press firmly onthe brake pedal, and keep your footoff the accelerator pedal.

CONTINUED

Driving

Page 201: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Automatic Transmission

Park (P) — This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page200.

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Reverse (R) — To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift. Press the release buttonbefore shifting into Reverse fromNeutral.

Neutral (N) — Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the car forany reason. Press on the brake pedalwhen you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

Drive (D4) — Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.You may notice the transmissionshifting up at higher speeds whenthe engine is cold. This helps theengine warm up faster.

Driving

Page 202: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Automatic Transmission

Drive (D3) —This position is similarto D4, except only the first threegears are selected. Use D3 whentowing a trailer in hilly terrain, or toprovide engine braking when goingdown a steep hill. D3 can also keepthe transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

For faster acceleration when in D3 orD4, you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down oneor two gears, depending on yourspeed.

Second (2) — To shift to Second,press the release button on the sideof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

First (1) — To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. With the leverin this position, the transmissionlocks in First gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D3 and D4,you can operate this transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

Driving

Page 203: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Automatic Transmission

Engine Speed LimiterIf you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer'sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine'scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Shift Lock ReleaseThis allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

1. Set the Parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

3. Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever.Use a small flat-tipped screwdriveror small metal plate (neither areincluded in the tool kit) to removethe cover. Carefully pry off theedge of the cover.

4. Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

Driving

Page 204: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Automatic Transmission

5. Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to Neutral.

6. Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the left side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your car isdeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Honda dealer.

Driving

Page 205: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Parking

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your car. The indicator onthe instrument panel shows that theparking brake is not fully released; itdoes not indicate that the parkingbrake is firmly set. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly or yourcar may roll if it is parked on anincline.

If your car has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the car frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission — making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn thefront wheels away from the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in first gear.

If the car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels toward the curb. If youhave a manual transmission, put it inreverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Parking TipsMake sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.On EX and EX-V6 modelsCheck the indicator on the driver'sdoor to verify that the securitysystem is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Driving

Page 206: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

The Braking System

Your Honda is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

Brake Wear IndicatorsThe front disc brakes on all modelshave audible brake wear indicators.They are also on the rear brakes ofcars equipped with ABS as standardequipment.When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic"screeching" sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible "screeching."

Driving

Page 207: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

The Braking System

Brake System DesignThe hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Anti-lock BrakesLX with ABS, EX and all V6 modelshave an Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) as standard equipment. It isoptional on other models.

ABS helps to prevent the wheelsfrom locking up and skidding duringhard braking, allowing you to retainsteering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the car continuesstraight ahead even though you turnthe steering wheel. The ABS helps toprevent lock-up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly; much faster than aperson can do it.

You should never pump thebrake pedal, this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as"stomp and steer."

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal, it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Driving

Front

Page 208: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

The Braking System

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop the car, itonly helps with steering controlduring braking. You should alwaysmaintain a safe following distancefrom other vehicles.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly, such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability. Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your car to veer intooncoming traffic or off the road.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

ABS Indicator

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage 55 ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your car as soon as possible.

Driving

*U.S. indicator shown

ABS INDICATOR*

Page 209: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Traction Control System

On LX V6 and EX V6 modelsYour Honda is equipped with aTraction Control System (TCS) toassist you in maintaining tractionwhile driving slowly on loose orslippery surfaces. The TCS assistsonly in low-speed, low-tractionconditions; up to approximately 18mph (30km/h).

The TCS monitors the speed of allfour wheels. When it senses a frontwheel losing traction, it appliesbraking to that wheel. The TCSindicator flashes when this occurs.

Driving with TCS requires no specialskills or technique. The TCS doesnot control your vehicle's wholebraking system and cannot preventskidding if you enter a corner toofast. It is still your responsibility todrive at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When starting out or driving at lowspeeds on a loose or slippery roadsurface, you may notice that thevehicle does not respond to theaccelerator in the same way it doesat other times. This is a sign the TCSis activating. You will see the TCSindicator light flash.

You should still install winter tires onyour vehicle during the winter. Makesure to use the same size originallysupplied with vehicle. Exercise thesame caution in winter driving as youwould if your vehicle was notequipped with TCS.

Driving with the compact spare tireinstalled (see page 296) mayactivate the TCS. You should turn offthe system.

If the brakes overheat while the TCSis activating, the TCS indicator willstop flashing and stay on temporarily.This indicates that the TCS systemhas turned off. After the brakes havecooled down (usually for about 10minutes), the TCS will turn back onand the indicator will turn off.

Driving

TCS INDICATOR

Page 210: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Traction Control System

TCS ON/OFF Switch

This switch is under the side vent. Itlets you turn the Traction ControlSystem on and off. You cannot turnoff the TCS while the TCS indicatorlight is flashing.

Deactivate the system by pressingthe TCS On/Off switch. The TCSindicator light comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.

The Traction Control System turnson every time you start the engine,even if you turned it off the last timeyou drove the vehicle.

TCS IndicatorThe TCS indicator comes on orflashes under the following condi-tions:

When you turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

When you manually turn off theTCS.

It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

If the system's diagnostics sensesa problem in the TCS, the indica-tor will come on and stay on.

If the brakes overheat, theindicator will come on.

CONTINUED

Driving

Page 211: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Traction Control System

If the TCS indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system by re-starting the engine, and watch theTCS indicator. If the indicatorremains on, or comes back on whiledriving, have the TCS inspected byyour Honda dealer. You can stilldrive the vehicle without TCS.

The TCS indicator may occasionallycome on for one or two seconds andthen go out. This is normal.

This indicator will come on alongwith the ABS indicator if there is aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see ABS Indicator on page205).

If the TCS indicator comes on alongwith the ABS indicator, it indicates aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see ABS Indicator on page55).

Driving

Page 212: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Driving in Bad Weather

Rain, fog, and snow conditionsrequire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your car well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in theseconditions.

Driving Technique — Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your car longer toreact, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long city spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Driving

CONTINUED

Page 213: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Driving in Bad Weather

Visibility — Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defrosters and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepage 115).

Traction — Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing "hydroplaning" (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. "Clear" roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Driving

Page 214: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Towing a Trailer

Your Honda has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

Load LimitsTotal Trailer Weight: The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,000 Ibs (450 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle'shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

Tongue Load: The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

Driving

Page 215: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Towing a Trailer

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

4-cylinder models:(DX, LX)

4,035 Ibs (1,830 kg)(EX)

4,080 Ibs (1,850 kg)

6-cylinder models:4,255 Ibs (1,930 kg)

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

4-cylinder models:(DX, LX)

2,180 Ibs (990 kg)on the front axle1,920 Ibs (870 kg)on the rear axle

(EX)2,205 Ibs (1000 kg)on the front axle1,940 Ibs (880 kg)on the rear axle

6-cylinder models:2,315 Ibs (1,050 kg)on the front axle1,960 Ibs (890 kg)on the rear axle

Checking LoadsThe best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Driving

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Page 216: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Towing a Trailer

Towing Equipment andAccessoriesTowing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

HitchesAny hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Safety ChainsAlways use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesHonda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 Ibs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle's hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle's hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Driving

Page 217: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Towing a Trailer

Trailer LightsYour vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector in the trunk. Refer to thedrawing in this page for the wiringcolor code and purpose of each pin.

If you use a converter, you can getthe connector and pins that matewith the connector in your vehiclefrom your Honda dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary intrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Driving

GROUND(BLACK)

BACK-UP LIGHT(GREEN/BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/BLUE)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

Page 218: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Towing a Trailer

Additional Trailer EquipmentMany states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don't,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Pre-Tow ChecklistWhen preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages 211 and 212).

The hitch, safety chain, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page 269),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

Driving

Page 219: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Towing a Trailer

Driving Safely With a TrailerThe added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle's handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

Towing Speeds and GearsDrive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use D4 position whentowing a trailer on level roads. D3 isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See "Driving on Hills" in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.)

Making Turns and BrakingMake turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

Driving on HillsWhen climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently between 3rd and 4thgears while going up a hill, shift toD3.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not "ride" the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Driving

Page 220: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Towing a Trailer

Handling Crosswinds and BuffetingCrosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Backing UpAlways drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the bottom of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

ParkingFollow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer's tires.

Driving

Page 221: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

218

Page 222: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Maintenance

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your car wellmaintained and to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage 345 for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

Maintenance Safety....................... 220Important Safety Precautions ..221

Maintenance Schedule.................. 222Maintenance Record..................... 229Owner Maintenance Checks........ 231Fluid Locations............................... 232Engine Oil....................................... 234

Adding Oil................................... 234Recommended Oil..................... 235Synthetic Oil............................... 235Additives..................................... 235Changing the Oil and Filter...... 236

Cooling System.............................. 239Adding Engine Coolant............. 239Replacing Engine Coolant........ 241

Windshield Washers..................... 246Transmission Fluid........................ 247

AutomaticTransmission.......................... 247

5-speed ManualTransmission.......................... 249

Brake and Clutch Fluid................. 251Brake System............................. 251Clutch System............................ 252

Power Steering............................... 252Air Cleaner Element...................... 253

Hood Latch..................................... 256Spark Plugs..................................... 256

Replacement............................... 256Specifications............................. 257

Battery............................................ 260Wiper Blades.................................. 263Air Conditioning System............... 265Air Conditioning Filter.................. 266Drive Belts...................................... 266Timing Belt..................................... 267Tires................................................ 267

Inflation...................................... 268Inspection................................... 270Maintenance............................... 270Tire Rotation.............................. 271Replacing Tires and Wheels .... 271Wheels and Tires....................... 272Winter Driving........................... 273

Snow Tires.............................. 273Tire Chains............................. 273

Lights.............................................. 274Replacing Bulbs......................... 276

Storing Your Car............................ 285

Maintenance

Page 223: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Maintenance Safety

Regularly maintaining your car is thebest way to protect your investment.Proper maintenance is essential toyour safety and the safety of yourpassengers. It will also reward youwith more economical, trouble-freedriving and help reduce air pollution.

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Maintenance

Improperly maintaining this caror failing to correct a problembefore driving can cause acrash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner'smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner'smanual.

Page 224: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety PrecautionsBefore you begin any maintenance,make sure your car is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust. Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Burns from hot parts. Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Injury from moving parts. Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance

Page 225: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Maintenance Schedule

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have your carserviced and what things needattention. It is essential that you haveyour car serviced as scheduled toretain its high level of safety,dependability, and emissions controlperformance.

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourvehicle as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

Avoid exceeding your car's loadlimit. This puts excess stress onthe engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your car. The loadlimit is shown on the label on thedriver's doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonableroads within the legal speed limit.

Drive your car regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page178).

Which Schedule to Follow:Service your car according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages. Select the schedulefor "Severe Conditions" if most ofyour driving is done under one ormore of the conditions listed on thatpage. Otherwise, follow the schedulefor "Normal Conditions."

Maintenance

Page 226: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Maintenance Schedule

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your car best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of GenuineHonda parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are "certified" to EPAstandards.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith # will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Maintenance

Page 227: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

U.S. OwnersFollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if thesevere driving conditionsspecified in the SevereConditions MaintenanceSchedule do not apply.

NOTE: If you onlyOCCASIONALLY drive under a"severe" condition, you shouldfollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Canadian OwnersFollow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 223.

* 1 : See timing belt on page 267 to determine need for replacement.

* 2 : Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.

Maintenance

Page 228: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in A, B, C as required for each distance/time interval. Follow thisschedule if the severe driving conditions described in the Severe Conditions Schedule on the next page do not apply.Canadian owners: Follow the schedule for Severe Conditions.

Maintenance

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page 223.

* 1 : Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.

NOTE:Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

page 271

Page 229: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

U.S. OwnersFollow the Severe ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if youdrive your vehicle MAINLYunder one or more of thefollowing conditions:

Driving less than 5 miles (8km) per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving lessthan 10 miles (16 km) per trip.Driving in extremely hot[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.Extensive idling or longperiods of stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, driving with acar top carrier, or driving inmountainous conditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, orde-iced roads.

Canadian OwnersFollow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 223.

* 1 : See timing belt on page 267 to determine need for replacement.

* 2 : Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.

*3 : See air conditioning filter on page 266 for replacement information under special driving conditions.

Maintenance

Page 230: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Use this schedule if your vehicle is MAINLY driven in any of the following Severe Conditions, or normally driven in Canada; otherwise use the NormalSchedule. Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in A, B, C, D as required for each distance/time.

Maintenance

CONTINUED

page 271

Page 231: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Maintenance

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page 223.

* 1 : See timing belt on page 267 to determine need for replacement.

* 2 : Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.

* 3 : See air conditioning filter on page 266 for replacement informationunder special driving conditions.

NOTE:Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

Page 232: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page 224) or severeconditions (page 226 ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Page 233: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

Maintenance

Page 234: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Owner Maintenance Checks

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Engine oil level — Check everytime you fil l the fuel tank. Seepage 182.

Engine coolant level — Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fil l the fuel tank. See page 184 .

Windshield washer fluid — Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page 246 .

Automatic transmission — Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page247.

Brakes — Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page 251.

Tires — Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page267.

Lights — Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage 274.

Maintenance

Page 235: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

4-cylinder Models

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(5-speed ManualTransmission only)(Gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

RADIATOR CAP

Page 236: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

RADIATOR CAP

COOLANTRESERVOIR

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

6-cylinder Models

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

Page 237: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Engine Oil

Maintenance

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

6-cylinder models

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Adding Oil

4-cylinder models

Page 238: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Engine Oil

Recommended OilOil is a major contributor to yourengine's performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute's latest requirements.

Genuine Honda Motor Oil is thepreferred 5W-20 lubricant for yourvehicle. It is highly recommendedthat you use Genuine Honda MotorOil in your vehicle for optimumengine protection.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays "For Gasoline Engines."

The SAE number tells you the oil'sviscosity or weight. Select the oil foryour vehicle according to this chart.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30oil may be used. However, it shouldbe replaced with 5W-20 at the nextoil change.

Synthetic OilYou may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

AdditivesYour Honda does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine's or transmission'sperformance and durability.

Maintenance

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

Page 239: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Engine Oil

Changing the Oil and FilterAlways change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the car. The car shouldbe raised on a service station-typehydraulic lift for this service. Unlessyou have the knowledge and properequipment, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1. Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Maintenance

Page 240: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Engine Oil

4-cylinder models

2. Open the hood and remove theengine oil fi l l cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

3. Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required toremove the filter.

4. Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:33 Ibf.ft (44 N.m , 4.5 kgf.m)

CONTINUED

Maintenance

DRAIN BOLTWASHER

6-cylinder models

WASHER DRAIN BOLT OIL FILTER

4-cylinder models

Page 241: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Engine Oil

6. Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

(4-cylinder models)4.5 US qt (4.3 , 3.8 Imp qt)(6-cylinder models)4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

8. Let the engine run for severalminutes and check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

9. Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmful to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

Maintenance

NOTICEOIL FILTER

6-cylinder models

Page 242: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Cooling System

Adding Engine Coolant

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.This coolant should always be amixture of 50 percent antifreeze and50 percent water. Never add straightantifreeze or plain water.

Always use Genuine Honda AllSeason Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.This coolant is pre-mixed with 50percent antifreeze and 50 percentwater. It does not require anyadditional mixing. If it is not available,you may use another major-brandnon-silicate coolant as a temporaryreplacement. Make sure it is a high-quality coolant recommended foraluminum engines. However,continued use of any non-Honda

coolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK6-cylinder models

Page 243: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Cooling System

1. Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

3. Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

4. The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

5. Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

Maintenance

RADIATOR CAP

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 244: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Cooling System

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your car's coolingsystem. They may not be compatiblewith the coolant or engine compo-nents.

Replacing Engine CoolantThe cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the car. Unlessyou have the tools and knowledge,you should have this maintenancedone by a skilled mechanic.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

4 cylinder models RESERVE TANK 6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

Page 245: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Cooling System

1. Open the hood. Make sure theengine and radiator are cool to thetouch.

Except EX- V6 modelTurn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe temperature control Dial allthe way clockwise. Turn off theignition and remove the key.

EX-V6 modelTurn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe temperature control dial to90°F (32° C). Turn off the ignitionand remove the key.

2. Remove the radiator cap.

4-cylinder models3. Loosen the drain plug on the

bottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Remove the drainbolt and washer from the engineblock.

Maintenance

DRAINBOLT

DRAINPLUG

6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models4-cylinder models

Page 246: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Cooling System

6-cylinder models3. Loosen the drain plug on the

bottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Loosen the drainbolt.

4. Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant, then put thetank back in its holder.

6-cylinder modelsWhen removing the reserve tank,first remove the cruise control cableand the ground cable from their clips.After installing the tank back inplace, put the cables back in theirclips.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

DRAIN PLUG RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK CAP

HOLDERDRAIN BOLT 4-cylinder models6-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

Page 247: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Cooling System

5. When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

6. 4-cylinder modelsPut a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt in theengine block. Tighten it securely.

Tightening torque:61 Ibf.ft (83 N.m , 8.5 kgf.m)

6-cylinder modelsTighten the drain bolt at the rearof the engine cylinder blocksecurely.

Tightening torque:7 Ibf.ft (10 N.m, 1.0 kgf.m)

7. 4-cylinder modelsLoosen the bleeder bolt on top ofthe engine.Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent anti-freezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.Tighten the bleeder bolt whencoolant comes out in a steadystream with no bubbles.

Maintenance

RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK CAP

HOLDER6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models Fill up to here

FILLER NECK FILLER NECK

Fill up to here6-cylinder models

Page 248: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Cooling System

6-cylinder modelsPour coolant into the radiator upto the base of the filler neck.

The cooling system capacity is:With 5-speed manual transmission:1.45 US gal (5.5 ,1.21 Imp gal)With automatic transmission:1.43 US gal (5.4 ,1.19 Imp gal)6-cylinder models1.48 US gal (5.6 ,1.23 Imp gal)

8. Start the engine and let it run forabout 30 seconds. Then turn offthe engine.

9. Fill the radiator with coolant up tothe base of the filler neck.

10. Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

11.Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

12.Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

13.Remove the radiator cap. Pourcoolant into the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck and into thereserve tank up to the MAX mark.

14.Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the cooling fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

15.Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

16.If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

Maintenance

4-cylinder models BLEEDER BOLT

Page 249: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Windshield Washers

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the headlight.

Check the reservoir's fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

Canadian ModelsThe low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page57 ).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

Do not use engine antifreeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antifreeze can damage your car's paint,while a vinegar/water solution candamage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer fluid.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Maintenance

LEVEL GAUGE

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

NOTICE

Page 250: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission4-cylinder models

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

1. Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

3. Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

4. Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

5. If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid). If it isnot available, you may use aDEXRON® III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission drained andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1as soon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drivethe vehicle a short distance.Do this three times. Then drain andrefill the transmission a final time.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

Page 251: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Transmission Fluid

6. Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Automatic Transmission6-cylinder models

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

1. Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

3. Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

4. Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Maintenance

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

Page 252: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Transmission Fluid

5. If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid). If it isnot available, you may use aDEXRON® III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission drained andrefilled with Honda ATF- Zlas soon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drivethe vehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refillthe transmission a final time.

6. Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

5-speed Manual Transmission

FILLERBOLT

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the car sitting onlevel ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole. Reinstallthe filler bolt and tighten it securely.

Maintenance

Correct level

Page 253: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Transmission Fluid

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an API service SG, SH or SJgrade motor oil with a viscosity ofSAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as atemporary replacement. An SGgrade is preferred, but an SH or SJgrade may be used if SG is notavailable. However, motor oil doesnot contain the proper additives andcontinued use can cause stiffershifting. Replace as soon as it isconvenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance

Page 254: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on the model.They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in the mainte-nance schedule.

Always use Honda DOT 3 brakefluid. If it is not available, youshould use only DOT 3 or DOT 4fluid, from a sealed container, as atemporary replacement. However,the use of any non-Honda brake fluidcan cause corrosion and decreasethe life of the system. Have thebrake system flushed and refilledwith Honda DOT 3 brake fluid assoon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your car's brakingsystem and can cause extensivedamage.

Brake System

4-cylinder models MIN

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

MAX

Page 255: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering

Clutch System

The fluid should be between theMIN and MAX marks on the side ofthe reservoir. If it is not, add brakefluid to bring it up to that level. Usethe same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Power Steering

Check the level when the engineis cold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

Maintenance

UPPER LEVEL

6 cylinder models LOWER LEVEL MIN

MAX

4-cylinder models MIN

MAX

Page 256: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Power Steering, Air Cleaner Element

UPPER LEVEL

6-cylinder models

Always use Honda PowerSteering Fluid. If it is not available,you may use another power steeringfluid as an emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Turning the steering wheel to full leftor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Air Cleaner ElementThe air cleaner element should becleaned or replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Cleaning (Severe Conditions)Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your Honda dealer to dothis service.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

Maintenance

NOTICE

LOWER LEVEL

Page 257: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Air Cleaner Element (4-cylinder Models)

ReplacementThe air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the passenger'sside of the engine compartment.To replace it:

CLAMPS

1. Unsnap the four hold-down clampsand remove the air cleanerhousing cover.

2. Remove the old air cleanerelement.

3. Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

4. Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

5. Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, snap the four hold-downclamps back into place.

Maintenance

Page 258: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Air Cleaner Element (6-cylinder Models)

ReplacementThe air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver'sside of the engine compartment.To replace it:

1. Loosen the four bolts and removethe air cleaner housing cover.

2. Remove the old air cleanerelement.

3. Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

4. Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

5. Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, tighten the four bolts.

Maintenance

BOLTS

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Page 259: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Hood Latch, Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)

Hood Latch

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts, including the pivot.Follow the time and distancerecommendations in theMaintenance Schedule. If you arenot sure how to clean and grease thelatch, contact your Honda dealer.

Spark PlugsThe spark plugs in your car shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

Replacement

1. Clean up any dirt and oil aroundthe spark plug caps.

2. Remove the spark plug cap bypulling it straight out.

3. Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Maintenance

LATCH ASSEMBLY SPARK PLUG CAP

Page 260: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)

4. Put the new spark plug into thesocket; then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

5. Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:13 lbf.ft (18 N.m, 1.8 kgf.m)

Tighten the spark plugs carefully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Ovcrtiglitening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

6. Install the spark plug cap.

7. Repeat this procedure for theother three spark plugs.

Specifications:

NGK:DENSO:

PZFR5F-11PKJ16CR-L11

Spark Plug Gap:0.04 in (1.1 mm)

Maintenance

NOTICE

Page 261: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Spark Plugs (6-cylinder Models)

The spark plugs in your car shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

1. Loosen the two holding clips byturning the heads one-quarter turncounterclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver. Remove the cover onthe front cylinder bank by pullingit straight up.

2. Clean up any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

3. Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

4. Use a wrench to remove thehexagon socket head cap boltholding the ignition coil. Removethe ignition coil by pulling itstraight out.

5. Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Maintenance

Replacement

HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP BOLT

HOLDING CLIP

Page 262: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Spark Plugs (6-cylinder Models)

6. Put the new spark plug into thesocket; then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

7. Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:13 lbf.ft (18 N.m , 1.8 kgf.m)

Tighten the spark plugs carefully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

8. Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe hexagon socket head cap bolt.

9. Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

10. Repeat this procedure for the other five spark plugs.

11. Reinstall the cover on the front cylinder bank while putting its mounting clip in the hole on the passenger's side. Secure the cover by turning the heads of the two holding clips one-quarter turn clockwise with a flat-tipped screwdriver.

Specifications:

NGK:DENSO:

PZFR5F-11PKJ16CR-L11

Spark Plug Gap:0.04 in (1.1 mm)

Maintenance

NOTICE

Page 263: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Battery

Check the condition of your car'sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery.The label on the battery explains thetest indicator's colors.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Maintenance

4-cylinder models

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

6-cylinder models

Page 264: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Battery

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.Wash hands after handling.

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative (—) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the car'selectrical system.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

4 cylinder models 6-cylinder models

Page 265: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Battery

On EX and EX-V6 modelsIf your car's battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the audio system willdisable itself. The next time you turnon the radio you will see "Code" inthe frequency display. Use thePreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode (see page 174 ).

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourcar's electronic controls. Detach thebattery cables before connecting thebattery to a charger.

Maintenance

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

NOTICE

Warning3
Rectangle
Page 266: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Wiper Blades

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace the blade:

1. Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.Raise the driver's side first, thenthe passenger's side.

2. Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold it in while youpush the blade assembly towardthe base of the arm.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Page 267: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Wiper Blades

3. Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

4. Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

5. Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

6. Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.Lower the passenger's side first,then the driver's side.

Maintenance

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

Page 268: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Air Conditioning System

Optional for U.S. DX modelYour car's air conditioning is a sealedsystem. Any major maintenance,such as recharging, should be doneby a qualified mechanic. You can doa couple of things to make sure theair conditioning works efficiently.

Periodically check the engine'sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

The condenser and radiator fins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor soft-bristle brush to clean them.

AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page328.)

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicefacility uses a refrigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures therefrigerant for reuse. Releasingrefrigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

Maintenance

NOTICE

NOTICE

Page 269: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Air Conditioning Filter, Drive Belts

Air Conditioning FilterThe air conditioning filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theclimate control system becomes lessthan usual. Have the air conditioningfilter replaced by your Honda dealer.

Drive Belts

Check the condition of the drivebelts (two on 4-cylinder models, oneon 6-cylinder models). Examine theedges of each belt for cracks orfraying.Check the tension of each belt bypushing on it with your thumbmidway between the pulleys.The belts should have the following"play" or deflection.

4-cylinder modelsAlternator belt:

(On vehicles without A/C)0.41 — 0.49 in (10.5 — 12.5 mm)(On vehicles with A/C)0.28 — 0.35 in (7.0 — 9.0 mm)

Power steering belt:0.51 — 0.63 in (13.0 — 16.0 mm)

Maintenance

ALTERNATOR BELT

4-cylinder modelsPOWER STEERINGBELT 6-cylinder models

POWER STEERING BELT

Page 270: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Drive Belts, Timing Belt, Tires

6-cylinder modelsPower steering belt:

0.51 — 0.65 in (13.0 — 16.5 mm)

If you see signs of wear or looseness,have your dealer adjust or replacethe belts.

Timing BeltThe timing belt and balancer beltshould normally be replaced at theintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Replace these belts at 60,000 miles(U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your car in one ormore of these conditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110° F,43°C).In very low temperatures(under — 20°F, — 29°C).

TiresTo safely operate your car, your tiresmust be the proper type and size, ingood condition with adequate tread,and correctly inflated. The followingpages give more detailed informationon how and when to check airpressure, how to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Maintenance

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Page 271: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Tires

InflationKeeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make your carride more harshly, are more prone todamage from road hazards, and wearunevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the carhas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive the carbefore checking the tire pressure,the tires can still be considered"cold" if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the car has been drivenseveral miles), you will see readings4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm2) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Maintenance

Page 272: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal DrivingThe following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

The compact spare tire pressure is:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm2 )

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver's doorjamb.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Maintenance

Page 273: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Tires

InspectionEvery time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

Your car's tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

MaintenanceIn addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

Maintenance

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Page 274: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Tires

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your car'soriginal tires were dynamic or "spin"balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

(LX with ABS ,EX,EX-V6)Improper wheel weights can damageyour car's aluminum wheels. Use onlyGenuine Honda wheel weights forbalancing.

Tire Rotation

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare "directional." This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,

they should be rotated only front-to-back.

Replacing Tires and WheelsThe tires that came with your carwere selected to match the perform-ance capabilities of the car whileproviding the best combination ofhandling, ride comfort, and long life.You should replace them with radialtires of the same size, load range,speed rating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire's sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your car can reduceits braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

NOTICE

Page 275: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Tires

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your car's handling.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the car. Tire size andconstruction can affect wheel speedand may cause the system to workinconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel's specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your car. Replacementwheels are available at your Hondadealer.

Wheels and TiresWheel:(DX)14 x 5 1/2 JJ

(LX, EX)15x6JJ

(LX-V6, EX-V6)15x6 1/2 JJ

Tire:(DX)

P195/70R 1490S

(LX, EX)P195/65R 1589H

(LX-V6, EX-V6)P205/65R 15 92V

See page 329 for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

Maintenance

Installing improper tires on yourcar can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner's manual.

mehul
Installing improper tires on your car can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner's manual. 07/10 16:11:09 31S5A930 03/07/ vehicle responsibility. To help decisions provided other this you hurt Of course, possible
Janet Hughes
Sticky Note
None set by Janet Hughes
Page 276: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Tires

Winter DrivingTires that are marked "M + S" or"All Season" on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Snow TiresIf you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour car's handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your car's

original equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

Tire ChainsMount snow chains on your vehiclewhen warranted by driving condi-tions or required by local laws. Makesure the chains are the correct sizefor your tires. Install them only onthe front tires.

4-cylinder modelsIf metal chains are used, they mustbe SAE class "S". Cable-type tractiondevices can also be used.

6-cylinder modelsUse only SAE class "S" cable-typetraction devices.

When installing chains, follow themanufacturer's instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed. Ifyou hear the chains contacting thebody or chassis, stop and investigate.Make sure the chains are installedtightly, and that they are notcontacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove the chains assoon as you begin driving on clearedroads.

Chains of the wrong size or that areimproperly installed can damage yourcar's brake lines, suspension, body, andwheels. Stop driving if you hear thechains hitting any part of the car.

Maintenance

NOTICE

Page 277: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

Check the operation of your car'sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourcar's visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

HEADLIGHT TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER LIGHT

PARKING LIGHT

Maintenance

Page 278: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT BACK-UP LIGHT

STOP/TAILLIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT TAILLIGHT

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page 327 todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

Maintenance

Page 279: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

Headlight AimingThe headlights were properly aimedwhen your car was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment of the headlights shouldbe performed by a Honda technicianor other qualified mechanic.

Replacing a Headlight BulbYour car has two bulbs on each side,four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb that is burned out.Your car uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

BULB

1. Open the hood.If you need to change a bulb onthe passenger's side (on thedriver's side on 6-cylinder models),remove the radiator reserve tank.

2. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

3. Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

4. Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

5. Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

6. Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

7. (Passenger's side on 4-cylindermodels, driver's side on 6-cylindermodels)Reinstall the radiator reserve tank.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Maintenance

NOTICE

TAB

Page 280: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

Replacing Front Turn Signal andSide Marker Light Bulbs

HOLDING CLIP

1. If you are changing the bulb onthe driver's side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger's side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clip from theinner fender.

3. Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

4. Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

5. Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pushing it in andturning counterclockwise until itunlocks.

6. Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

7. Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

8. Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

9. Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the holding clip. Lock it inplace by pushing on the center.

Maintenance

Page 281: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

Replacing a Parking Light Bulb

1. The parking light bulb is under theheadlight bulb.

Turn the bulb holder one-quarterturn counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lens.

2. Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

3. Put the bulb holder back into itshole in the lens, and turn itclockwise until it locks.

4. Turn on the parking lights tomake sure the new bulb works.

Maintenance

Page 282: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Fenders)

1. Open the trunk.

Remove the fastener from the sideof the trunk lining by turning itcounterclockwise with a coin. Pullthe lining back.

2. Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight or turnsignal.

3. Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

4. Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

5. Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

6. Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

7. Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

8. Put the fastener in the hole on theside of the trunk lining and pushon the center until it locks (thecenter is flush with the head).

Maintenance

FASTENER

Page 283: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

1. Open the trunk.

2. Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: taillight or back-uplight.

3. Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

4. Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pulling it straight outof its socket.

5. Install the new bulb in the socket.

6. Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly.

7. Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Maintenance

Page 284: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

1. Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

2. Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.

3. Install the new bulb and reinstallthe socket. Make sure the newbulb is working.

Replacing a Rear License Bulb

1. Remove the license light assemblyby carefully prying on the leftedge of the lens with a flat-tipscrewdriver and pulling theassembly out.

2. Remove the lens from the bulbholder by pulling the lens whilesqueezing the tabs on both sidesof the holder.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

BULB

Page 285: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

3. Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

4. Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

5. Put the lens back on the bulbholder and push it until it latches.

6. Slide the left side of the lightassembly into the hole. Push onthe right side to latch theassembly into place.

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLightsThe ceiling light, door light andvanity mirror light come apart thesame way, but they do not use thesame type of bulb.

1. Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Door light:Not available on DX modelPry on the top middle of the lens.

Ceiling light:Pry on the front edge of the lensnear both sides.

Spotlight:Not available on DX modelpry on the front edge in front ofboth spotlights.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

3. Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Maintenance

CEILING LIGHT

Page 286: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

On all models except DX model On all models except DX model On all models except DX model

Maintenance

SPOTLIGHT DOOR LIGHT SUN VISOR

Page 287: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Lights

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

1. Open the trunk. Pull down thetrunk light cover.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

3. Push the new bulb into the metaltabs.

4. Push the cover back in place.

Maintenance

TRUNK LIGHT

Page 288: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Storing Your Car

If you need to park your car for anextended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your car back on the road. Ifpossible, store your car indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page 235).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(5-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

Block the rear wheels.

If the car is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe car is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the car with a "breathable"cover, one made from a porousmaterial such as cotton.Nonporous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your car for 12 monthsor longer, have your Honda dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000km) maintenance schedule as soonas you take it out of storage (seepage 224). The replacements calledfor in the maintenance schedule arenot needed unless the car hasactually reached that time or mileage.

Maintenance

Page 289: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

286

Page 290: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Appearance Care

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Honda helps to keep it "new"looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your car andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels and interior. Alsoincluded are several things you cando to help prevent corrosion.

Exterior Care.................................. 288Washing...................................... 288Waxing........................................ 289Aluminum Wheels.....................289Paint Touch-up...........................289

Interior Care................................... 290Carpeting.................................... 290Floor Carpet............................... 290Fabric.......................................... 291Vinyl............................................ 291Leather........................................291Seat Belts.................................... 292Windows..................................... 292Air Fresheners........................... 292

Corrosion Protection..................... 293Body Repairs.................................. 294

Appearance Care

Page 291: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Exterior Care

WashingFrequent washing helps preserveyour car's beauty. Dirt and grit canscratch the paint, while tree sap andbird droppings can permanently ruinthe finish.

Wash your car in a shady area, not indirect sunlight. If the car is parked inthe sun, move it into the shade andlet the exterior cool down before youstart.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner'sManual.

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your car.

Rinse the car thoroughly with coolwater to remove loose dirt.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Wash the car using the water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe car does not need waxing.

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

As you dry the car, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page 289).

Appearance Care

NOTICE

Page 292: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Exterior Care

WaxingAlways wash and dry the whole carbefore waxing it. You should waxyour car, including the metal trim,whenever water sits on the surfacein large patches. It should form intobeads or droplets after waxing.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes — A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Hondawhen it is new.

Polishes — Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Honda ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the car does notneed waxing.

Aluminum WheelsOn LX with ABS, EX and EX-V6 modelsClean your Honda's aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Paint Touch-upYour dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your car's color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver's doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your car frequently for chipsor scratches in the paint. Repairthem right away to prevent corrosionof the metal underneath. Use thetouch-up paint only on small chipsand scratches. More extensive paintdamage should be repaired by aprofessional.

Appearance Care

Page 293: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Interior Care

CarpetingVacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

Floor Mats

On all EX models and LX-V6 modelThe Genuine Honda driver's floormat that came with your car wasdesigned to be hooked over the floormat anchor. This keeps the floor matfrom sliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals.

If you remove the floor mat, makesure to re-anchor it when you put itback in your car.

If you replace it, use a genuineHonda floor mat that is designed tobe used with the floor mat anchor inyour car.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat inthe driver's footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

Appearance Care

Page 294: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Interior Care

FabricVacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

VinylRemove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

LeatherOn EX with leather and EX-V6 modelsVacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

Instruments and Controls

Page 295: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Interior Care

Seat Belts

LOOP

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the car.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

WindowsClean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

The rear window defogger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning the rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Air FreshenersIf you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of your car,it is best to use a solid type. Someliquid air fresheners contain chemi-cals that may cause parts of theinterior trim and fabric to crack ordiscolor.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Appearance Care

NOTICE

Page 296: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Corrosion Protection

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your car:

1. Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thecar stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

2. Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the car.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Honda. You canhelp keep your car from corrodingby performing some simple periodicmaintenance:

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your car. This isespecially important in areas thatuse road salt in winter. It is also agood idea in humid climates andareas subject to salt air. Carsequipped with ABS have a sensorand wiring at each wheel. Becareful not to damage them.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourcar inspected and repairedperiodically.

Appearance Care

Page 297: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Body Repairs

Body repairs can affect your car'sresistance to corrosion. If your carneeds repairs after a collision, payclose attention to the parts used inthe repair and the quality of thework.

Make sure the repair facility usesGenuine Honda replacement bodyparts. Some companies make sheetmetal pieces that seem to duplicatethe original Honda body parts, butare actually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant Genuine Honda parts used inthe repair. Although most insurersrecognize the quality of originalparts, some may try to specify thatthe repairs be done with otheravailable parts. You should investi-gate this before any repairs havebegun.

Take your car to your authorizedHonda dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Appearance Care

Page 298: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Taking Care of the Unexpected

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your car towed.

Compact Spare Tire....................... 296Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 297If Your Engine Won't Start........... 302

Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor OperatesVery Slowly............................. 303

The Starter OperatesNormally................................. 304

Jump Starting................................. 304If Your Engine Overheats............. 307Low Oil Pressure Indicator.......... 309Charging System Indicator........... 310Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 311

Readiness Codes........................ 312Brake System Indicator................ 313Closing the Moonroof................... 314Fuses............................................... 315

Checking and Replacing........... 316Emergency Towing....................... 320

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 299: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Compact Spare Tire

Your car has a compact spare tirethat takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put back onyour car as soon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour car. Do not use your sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

Page 300: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Changing a Flat Tire

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

1. Park the car on firm, level andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark (automatic) or Reverse(manual). Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn on the hazard warning lightsand turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the car whileyou change the tire.

3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

4. Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

5. The tools are in the tool box onthe right side of the trunk. Takethe tools out of the tool box.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

The car can easily roll off thejack, seriously injuring anyoneunderneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the car when itis supported only by the jack.

TRUNK FLOOR TOOL BOX

SPARE TIRE JACK

Page 301: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Changing a Flat Tire

6. The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

7. Turn the jack's end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

8. Loosen the four wheel nuts (4-cylinder) or five (V-6) 1/2 turnwith the wheel wrench.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

JACK

WHEEL NUTS

Page 302: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Changing a Flat Tire

9. Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

10. Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

DX and LX models:Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriveror other tool. The wheel covercannot be removed without firstremoving the wheel nuts.

11. Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Temporarily place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.Placing the wheel face down couldmar its finish.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

JACKING POINT

EXTENSION

WHEEL WRENCH

Page 303: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Changing a Flat Tire

12. Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

13. Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

14. Lower the car to the ground andremove the jack.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

BRAKE HUB

Page 304: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Changing a Flat Tire

15. Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:80 lbf.ft (108N.m,11 kgf.m)

16. LX with ABS, EX, EX-V6 modelsRemove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

4-cylinder model 6-cylinder model

Page 305: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won't Start

17. Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

18. Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

19. Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

20. Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack's end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

21. Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

If Your Engine Won't StartDiagnosing why your engine won'tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine's startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack and toolssecurely before driving.

WING BOLT SPACERCONE

Page 306: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

If Your Engine Won't Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very SlowlyWhen you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Your car has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page 57).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don't light at all,the battery is discharged. SeeJump Starting on page 304.

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (SeeEmergency Towing on page 320 .)

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page 260). You canthen try jump starting the car froma booster battery (see page 304).

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 307: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

If Your Engine Won't Start, Jump Starting

The Starter Operates NormallyIn this case, the starter motor'sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to Starting theEngine on page 193 .Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page 315).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See EmergencyTowing on page 320 .

Jump StartingIf your car's battery has run down,you may be able to start the engineby using a booster battery. Althoughthis seems like a simple procedure,you should take several precautions.

You cannot start a Honda with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

To jump start your car, follow thesedirections closely:

1. Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page 260). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can freeze.Attempting to jump start with a frozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

2. Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: climate control, stereosystem, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

NOTICE

Page 308: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Jump Starting

3. Connect one jumper cable to thepositive (+ ) terminal on yourHonda's battery. Connect theother end to the positive (+)terminal on the booster battery.

4. Connect the second jumper cableto the negative (—) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

5. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

CONTINUED

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

Page 309: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Jump Starting

6. Start your car. If the starter motorstill operates slowly, check thejumper cable connections to makesure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

7. Once your car is running, discon-nect the negative cable from yourcar, then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour car, then the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the car until all aredisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

6-cylinder models 4-cylinder modelsBOOSTERBATTERY 6-cylinder models

BOOSTERBATTERY

Page 310: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

If Your Engine Overheats

The pointer of your car's tempera-ture gauge should stay in the mid-range under most conditions. It maygo higher if you are driving up a longsteep hill on a very hot day. If itclimbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Your car can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1. Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and coolingsystem and all other accessories.Turn on the hazard warningindicators.

2. If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

3. If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

NOTICE

Page 311: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

If Your Engine Overheats

4. If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

5. Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

6. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see EmergencyTowing on page 320).

7. If you don't find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page184). If the level is below the

MIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

8. If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointer

reaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

9. Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

10. Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

11. Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See EmergencyTowing on page 320.)

12. If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 312: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn offthe engine as soon as you can safely getthe car stopped.

1. Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

2. Let the car sit for a minute. Openthe hood and check the oil level(see page 182). Although oil leveland oil pressure are not directlyconnected, an engine that is verylow on oil can lose pressure duringcornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

3. If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page 234).

4. Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See EmergencyTowing on page 320.)

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Page 313: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Charging System Indicator

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itconies on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C, reardefogger, cruise control, etc. Try notto use other electrically-operatedcontrols such as the power windows.Keep the engine running and takeextra care not to stall it. Starting theengine will discharge the batteryrapidly.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 314: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

(For L4- LEV)This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates one of theengine's emissions control systemsmay have a problem. Even thoughyou may feel no difference in yourcar's performance, it can reduceyour fuel economy and cause yourcar to put out excessive emissions.Continued operation may causeserious damage.

(For V6 and L4- ULEV)This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, it indicates one ofthe engine's emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour car's performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeyour car to put out excessiveemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourcar, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedriving trips.

If the indicator remains on past threedriving trips, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the carchecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your car if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

If you keep driving with themalfunction indicator lamp on, you candamage your car's emissions controlsand engine. Those repairs may not becovered by your car's warranties.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Page 315: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness CodesYour car has certain "readinesscodes" that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your car's battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your car for astate emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. See StateEmissions Testing on page 336.

(For V6 and L4-ULEV)To check if they are set, turn theignition ON (II), but do not startthe engine. The MalfunctionIndicator Lamp will come on for20 seconds. If it then goes off,the readiness codes are set.If it blinks 5 times, the readinesscodes are not set. See StateEmissions Testing on pages 301 and302.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 316: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Brake System Indicator

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR*

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the car'sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page 251). If thefluid level is low, take the car to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system's dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before the carbegins to slow down, and you willhave to press harder on the pedal.The distance needed to stop will bemuch longer.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the car. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See EmergencyTowing on page 320 .)

If you must drive the car a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

*U.S. indicator shown

Page 317: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Closing the Moonroof

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

1. Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page 315). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

2. Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

3. Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

ROUND PLUG

4. Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

SOCKET

5. Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

6. Remove the wrench. Replace theround plug.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 318: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Fuses

All the electrical circuits in your carhave fuses to protect them from ashort circuit or overload. Thesefuses are located in three fuse boxes.

The interior fuse boxes are locatedon each side of the dashboard. Toopen an interior fuse box, open thecar door. Pull the cover open, thentake it out of its hinges by pulling ittoward you.

UNDER-HOOD TAB

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the back of the engine compart-ment on the passenger's side. Toopen it, push the tabs as shown.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

INTERIOR

Page 319: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Fuses

Checking and Replacing FusesIf something electrical in your carstops working, the first thing youshould check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages318 and 319, or the diagram on the

fuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component'soperation.

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

2. Remove the cover from the fusebox.

3. Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

FUSE PULLER

4. Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

BLOWN

Page 320: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Fuses

BLOWN

5. Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If you cannot drive the car withoutfixing the problem, and you do nothave a spare fuse, take a fuse of thesame rating or a lower rating fromone of the other circuits. Make sureyou can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the cigarettelighter or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Replacing a fuse with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment fuse with the proper rating for thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

6. If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your car.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your car checkedby a qualified mechanic.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Page 321: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Fuses

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 322: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Fuses

INTERIOR FUSE BOXESDRIVER'S SIDE

* : On Canadian models

Taking Care of the Unexpected

PASSENGER'S SIDE

* : On Canadian models

Page 323: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Emergency Towing

If your car needs to be towed, call aprofessional towing service or, if youbelong to one, an organization thatprovides roadside assistance. Nevertow your car behind another vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

Flat-bed Equipment The operatorloads your car on the back of a truck.This is the best way to transportyour Honda.

Wheel-Lift Equipment — The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground. This isan acceptable way to tow yourHonda.

Sling-type Equipment — The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the car offthe ground. Your car's suspensionand body can be seriously damaged.This method of towing isunacceptable.

If your Honda cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If due todamage, your car must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following:

5-speed Manual TransmissionRelease the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

Automatic Transmission:Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D4, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshift the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourcar must be transported with the frontwheels off the ground.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the car no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Page 324: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Emergency Towing

If you decide to tow your car with allfour wheels on the ground, makesure you use a properly-designed andattached tow bar. Prepare the car fortowing as described above, and leavethe ignition switch in Accessory (I)so the steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsfreely before you begin towing.

Trying to lift or tow your car by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the car's weight.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

NOTICE

Page 325: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

322

Page 326: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Technical Information

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle's tires andemissions control systems.

Identification Numbers................. 324Specifications................................. 326DOT Tire Quality Grading........... 329

Treadwear.................................. 329Traction....................................... 329Temperature.............................. 330

Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 331Driving in Foreign Countries....... 332Emissions Controls........................ 333

The Clean Air Act...................... 333Crankcase Emissions Control

System..................................... 333Evaporative Emissions Control

System..................................... 333Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery................................. 333Exhaust Emissions Controls.... 334

PGM-FI System..................... 334Ignition Timing Control

System.................................334Three Way Catalytic

Converter............................ 334Replacement Parts..................... 334

Three Way Catalytic Converter... 335State Emissions Testing............... 336

Technical Information

Page 327: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Identification Numbers

Your car has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourcar for warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour car. The easiest place to findthe VIN is on a plate fastened to thetop of the dashboard. You can see itby looking through the windshieldon the driver's side. It is also on theCertification label attached to thedriver's doorjamb, and is stamped onthe engine compartment bulkhead.The VIN is also provided in bar codeon the Certification label.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Technical Information

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Page 328: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Identification Numbers

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

4-cylinder Models 6-cylinder Models

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

Technical Information

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

MANUALTRANSMISSIONNUMBER ENGINE NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

Page 329: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Specifications

*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 , 0.13 Imp gal)

*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

*3 : 6-cylinder models

Technical Information

* : 6-cylinder models

* : 6-cylinder models

Page 330: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Specifications

Technical Information

CONTINUED

*1 DX

*2 LX, EX

*3 6-cylinder models

page 321

page 320

pages 257 259

Page 331: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Specifications

*1 : DX

*2 : LX, EX

*3: 4-cylinder models

*4 : 6-cylinder models

Technical Information

Page 332: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Technical Information

Page 333: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

Technical Information

Page 334: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Oxygenated Fuels

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel's contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:ETHANOL (ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name "Gasohol."

MTBE (Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

METHANOL (methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

Technical Information

Page 335: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Driving in Foreign Countries

If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your car back intocompliance will require the replace-ment of several components, such asthe oxygen sensors and the threeway catalytic converter. These re-placements are not covered underwarranty.

Technical Information

Page 336: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Emissions Controls

The burning of gasoline in your car'sengine produces several byproducts.Some of these are carbon monoxide(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) andhydrocarbons (HC). Gasolineevaporating from the tank alsoproduces hydrocarbons. Controllingthe production of NOx, CO, and HCis important to the environment.Under certain conditions of sunlightand climate, NOx and HC react toform photochemical "smog." Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

The Clean Air ActThe United States Clean Air Act*sets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page224.

* In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystemYour car has a Positive CrankcaseVentilation System. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine'scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The Positive CrankcaseVentilation valve routes them from

the crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystemAs gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

Onboard Refueling VaporRecoveryThe Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

Technical Information

Page 337: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions ControlsThe exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control and ThreeWay Catalytic Converter. Thesethree systems work together tocontrol the engine's combustion andminimize the amount of HC, CO, andNOx that comes out the tailpipe. Theexhaust emissions control systemsare separate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

PGM-FI SystemThe PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-ing conditions.

Ignition Timing Control SystemThis system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterThe three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine's exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen(N2), and water vapor.

Replacement PartsThe emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newGenuine Honda replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your car.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your car. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

Technical Information

Page 338: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your car away from high grass,dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine's per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your car's three way catalyticconverter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your car diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Technical Information

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Page 339: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness CodesIf you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain "readinesscodes" that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95° F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (approximately 3minutes).

Technical Information

Page 340: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

State Emissions Testing

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 90 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD4 (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do notuse the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Honda dealer.

Technical Information

Page 341: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

338

Page 342: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Warranty and Customer Relations

Customer RelationsInformation................................. 340

U.S. Zone Office Map.................... 341Canada Zone Office Map.............. 342Warranty Coverages..................... 343Reporting Safety Defects

(U.S. Vehicles)........................... 344Authorized Manuals...................... 345

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 343: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Customer Relations Information

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership's management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership'smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Relations Zone Office.Refer to the U.S. and Canadian ZoneOffice maps on the following pages.

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page 324)Name and address of the dealerwho services your carDate of purchaseMileage on your carYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thecar to you

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 344: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

U.S. Zone Office Map

The addresses and telephone numbers are subject to change. If you cannotreach your Zone office, ask your Honda dealer for the current information.

Western Zone

P.O. Box 2260

700 Van Ness Avenue

Torrance, California

90501- 1490

(310) 781-4565

Northwestern Zone

P.O. Box 20186

12439 N.E. Airport Way

Portland, Oregon 97230

(503) 256-0943

(also includes Alaska and

Hawaii)

South Centra! Zone

4529 Royal Lane

Irving, Texas 75063

(972) 929-5481

Centra! Zone

101 South Stanfield Road

Troy, Ohio 45373

(937) 332-6250

Northeastern Zone

115 Gaither Drive

Mt. Laurel, New Jersey 08054

(856) 235-5533

Includes: NYC Metro area and

Fairfield County, CT area

Mid-Atlantic Zone

902 Wind River Ln., Suite 200

Gaithersburg, Maryland 20878

(301) 990-2020

Southeastern Zone

P.O. Box 1606

1500 Morrison Parkway

Alpharetta, Georgia 30009-1606

(770) 442-2045

North Central Zone

601 Campus Drive, Suite A-9

Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004

(847) 870-5600

New England Zone

555 Old County Road

Windsor Locks, Connecticut 06096

(860) 623-3310

See Zone 5 for:

NYC Metro area and

Fairfield County, CT area

West Central Zone

1600 South Abilene Street, Suite D

Aurora, Colorado 80012

(303) 696-3935

Puerto Rico and U.S. V.I.

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

(787)250-4318

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 345: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Canada Zone Office Map

CUSTOMER RELATIONSRELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTELE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416) 287- 4776

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 346: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Warranty Coverages

U.S. OwnersYour new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

New Car Limited Warranty — coversyour new vehicle, except for thebattery, emissions control systemsand accessories, against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty — these twowarranties cover your vehicle's emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty — this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty — a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty— all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Accessory Limited Warranty —Genuine Honda Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty — covers all GenuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty — provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty — providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns the car.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2001 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda's originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Canadian OwnersPlease refer to the 2000 WarrantyManual that came with your car.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 347: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safely from the Hotline.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 348: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)The following publications covering the operation andservicing of your vehicle can be obtained from HelmIncorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone numberon the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can

pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to

Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

61S8008

61S8009

61S8008EL

61S8030

31S84630

HON-R

Page 349: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Authorized Manuals

P.O. BOX 07280 DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207 1-800-782-4356

Service Manual:This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

Body Repair Manual:This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

Page 350: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Index

Accessories and Modifications.... 186Accessories................................. 186Additional Safety Precaution.... 187Modifications............................. 187

ACCESSORY (Ignition KeyPosition)........................................ 74

Accessory Power Socket.............. 106Additives, Engine Oil..................... 234Airbag (SRS) ...................................... 9Air Cleaner Element...................... 253Air Conditioning............................. 110

Maintenance............................... 265Usage.......................................... 110

Air Conditioning Filter.................. 266Air Pressure, Tires........................ 268Alcohol in Gasoline........................ 331Antifreeze....................................... 239Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Description................................. 204Indicator............................... 55, 205Operation.................................... 204

Anti-theft Steering Column Lock.. 73Appearance Care........................... 287Audio System................ 125, 137, 153

Automatic Speed Control................ 68Automatic Transmission............... 196

Capacity, Fluid........................... 326Checking Fluid Level....... 247, 249Shifting........................................ 196Shift Lever Position Indicator.. 197Shift Lever Positions................. 197Shift Lock Release..................... 200

BatteryCharging System Light...... 54, 310Jump Starting............................. 304Maintenance............................... 260Specifications............................. 329

Before Driving............................... 177Belts, Seat........................................... 8Beverage Holder............................ 104Body Repair.................................... 296Brakes

Anti-lock System (ABS)............ 204Break-in, New Linings .............. 178Bulb Replacement..................... 281Fluid............................................ 251Parking........................................ 101

System Indicator.......................... 55Wear Indicators......................... 203

Braking System.............................. 203Break-in, New Car......................... 178Brightness Control, Instruments... 63Brights, Headlights......................... 62Bulb Replacement

Back-up Lights........................... 281Brake Lights............................... 281Ceiling Light............................... 282Courtesy Light........................... 283Front Parking Lights................. 278Front Side Marker Lights......... 277Headlights.................................. 276High-mount Brake Light.......... 281License Plate Lights.................. 281Specifications............................. 327Spotlight...................................... 283Trunk Light................................ 284Turn Signal Lights..................... 277

Bulbs, Halogen............................... 276

CONTINUED

Page 351: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Index

Capacities Chart............................. 326Carbon Monoxide Hazard.............. 49Carrying Cargo.............................. 188Cassette Player

Care.............................................151Operation........................... 130, 148

CAUTION, Explanation of............... iiCD Changer.......................... 133, 165CD Player........................................ 142Certification Label......................... 324Chains............................................. 273Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 297Changing Engine Coolant............. 241Changing Oil

How to......................................... 235When to....................................... 224

Charging System Indicator .... 54, 310Checklist, Before Driving............. 192Childproof Door Locks................... 79Child Seats........................................ 27

Tether Anchorage Points........... 38Cleaner, Air.................................... 253Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels..................... 289

Carpeting.................................... 290Exterior....................................... 288Fabric.......................................... 291Interior........................................ 290Seat Belts.................................... 292Vinyl............................................ 291Window....................................... 292

Climate Control System................ 117Clock, Setting the .......................... 102Clutch Fluid.................................... 252CO in the Exhaust......................... 333Coin Box......................................... 103Cold Weather, Starting in............. 194Compact Spare............................... 296Console Compartment.................. 103Consumer Information*................ 340Controls, Instruments and.............. 51Coolant

Adding......................................... 239Checking..................................... 184Proper Solution.......................... 239Temperature Gauge.................... 59

Corrosion Protection..................... 293Crankcase Emissions Control

System......................................... 333Cruise Control Operation............... 68

Customer Relations Office........... 340

DANGER, Explanation of................. iiDashboard........................................ 52Daytime Running Lights................. 63Defects, Reporting Safety............. 344Defogger, Rear Window................. 64Dimensions..................................... 328Dimming the Headlights................ 62Dipstick

Automatic Transmission . 247, 248Engine Oil................................... 182

Directional Signals........................... 64Disc Brake Wear Indicators......... 203Disposal of Used Oil...................... 238Doors

Locking and Unlocking............... 74Power Door Locks....................... 75

DOT Tire Quality Grading........... 329Downshifting, 5-speed Manual

Transmission.............................. 195Drive Belts...................................... 266Driver and Passenger Safety............ 5

Page 352: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Index

Driving............................................ 191Economy..................................... 185In Bad Weather.......................... 209In Foreign Countries................. 332

Economy, Fuel............................... 185Emergencies on the Road............. 295

Battery, Jump Starting.............. 304Brake System Indicator............ 313Changing a Flat Tire................. 297Charging System Indicator...... 310Checking the Fuses................... 316Low Oil Pressure Indicator...... 309Malfunction Indicator Lamp.... 311Manually Closing Moonroof.... 314Overheated Engine................... 307

Emergency Brake.......................... 101Emergency Flashers....................... 66Emergency Towing....................... 320Emissions Controls........................ 333Engine

Belts.............................................266Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 59

Malfunction IndicatorLamp................................. 55, 311

Oil Pressure Indicator......... 54, 309Oil, What Kind to Use............... 234Overheating................................ 307Specifications............................. 327Speed Limiter..................... 196, 200Starting........................................ 193

Engine Speed Limiter........... 196, 200Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 331Evaporative Emissions Controls.. 333Exhaust Fumes................................ 49Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

Belts by......................................... 17Exterior, Cleaning the................... 290

Fabric, Cleaning............................. 291Fan, Interior.................................... 110Features, Comfort and

Convenience............................... 109Filling the Fuel Tank..................... 178Filter

Air Conditioning........................ 266Oil................................................ 234

5-speed Manual TransmissionChecking Fluid Level................ 249

5-speed Manual TransmissionShifting the................................. 195

Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 66Flat Tire, Changing a.................... 297Fluids

Automatic Transmission .. 247, 248Brake...........................................251Clutch.......................................... 252Manual Transmission............... 249Power Steering........................... 252Windshield Washer................... 246

FM Stereo RadioReception.................................... 158

Folding Rear Seat............................ 92Foreign Countries, Driving in...... 332Four-way Flashers........................... 66Fuel.................................................. 178

Fill Door and Cap....................... 178Gauge............................................ 58Octane Requirement................. 178Oxygenated................................ 331Tank, Filling the......................... 178

Fuses, Checking the...................... 316CONTINUED

Page 353: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Index

Headlights......................................... 62Aiming......................................... 276Automatic Lighting Off............... 63Daytime Running Lights............. 63Lights On Indicator..................... 53Low Beams, Turning on............. 62Reminder Chime.......................... 62Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 278Turning on.................................... 62

Head Restraints............................... 92Heating and Cooling...................... 110High Altitude, Starting at.............. 194HomeLink Universal

Transmitter.................................. 83Hood, Opening the ........................ 180Hydraulic Clutch............................ 252Hydroplaning.................................. 210

Identification Number, Vehicle.... 326Ignition

Keys............................................... 71Switch............................................ 73Timing Control System............. 336

Immobilizer System......................... 72

Important Safety Precautions.......... 6Indicators, Instrument Panel.......... 53Infant Restraint................................ 28Infant Seats....................................... 28

Tether Anchorage Points........... 39Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 268Inside Mirror.................................... 98Inspection, Tire.............................. 270Instrument Panel............................. 53Instrument Panel Brightness......... 63Interior Cleaning............................ 290Interior Lights................................ 106Introduction......................................... i

Jacking up the Car......................... 209Jack, Tire........................................ 298Jump Starting................................. 304

Keys................................................... 71

Gas Mileage, Improving................ 185Gasohol........................................... 331Gasoline.......................................... 178

Gauge............................................ 58Octane Requirement................. 178Tank, Filling the......................... 178

Gas Station Procedures................. 178Gauges

Engine Coolant Temperature .... 59Fuel................................................59Speedometer................................ 58Tachometer.................................. 58

Gearshift Lever PositionsAutomatic Transmission........... 1975-speed Manual

Transmission.......................... 195Glass Cleaning............................... 292Glove Box......................................... 82

Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 278Hazard Warning Flashers............... 66

Page 354: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Index

Label, Certification........................ 324Lane Change, Signaling.................. 64Lap/Shoulder Belts......................... 40Lights

Bulb Replacement..................... 278Indicator........................................ 53Parking.......................................... 62Turn Signal................................... 64

LOCK (Ignition Key Position)....... 73Locks

Anti-theft Steering Column........ 73Fuel Fill Door............................. 178Glove Box..................................... 82Power Door.................................. 75Trunk............................................ 80

Low Coolant Level......................... 184Lower Gear, Downshifting to a.... 195Low Oil Pressure Indicator.... 52, 309Lubricant Specifications Chart.... 326Luggage.......................................... 188

Maintenance................................... 219Owner Maintenance Checks.... 231Record......................................... 229Required Indicator....................... 60Safety...........................................220Schedule............................ 224 - 228

Malfunction Indicator Lamp.. 55, 311Manual Transmission.................... 195Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 249Meters, Gauges................................ 57Methanol in Gasoline.................... 331Mirrors, Adjusting......................... 100Moonroof.......................................... 88

Closing Manually....................... 314Operation...................................... 98

Neutral Gear Position.................... 198New Vehicle Break-in................... 178Normal Shift Speeds...................... 196NOTICE, Explanation of................... iiNumbers, Identification................ 324

Octane Requirement, Gasoline.... 178Odometer.......................................... 58Odometer, Trip................................ 59Oil

Change, How to ......................... 235Change, When to....................... 224Checking Engine....................... 182Pressure Indicator............... 54, 309Selecting Proper Viscosity

Chart....................................... 235ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 74Operation in Foreign Countries... 332Outside Mirrors............................... 99Overheating, Engine..................... 306Owner Maintenance Checks........ 231Oxygenated Fuel........................... 331

Panel Brightness Control............... 63Park Gear Position......................... 198Parking............................................ 202

CONTINUED

Page 355: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Index

Parking Brake................................ 101Parking Lights.................................. 63Parking Over Things that Burn... 335PGM-FI System.............................. 334Polishing and Waxing................... 289Pre-Drive Safety Checklist............. 11Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts.......... 17Protecting Adults............................. 12

Additional Safety Precautions.... 18Advice for Pregnant Women...... 17

Protecting Children......................... 19Protecting Infants........................ 28Protecting Larger Children........ 34Protecting Small Children.......... 31Using Child Seats with

Tethers......................................37

Radiator Overheating.................... 309Radio/Cassette Sound System.... 125Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement... 281Rear Seat Armrest........................... 94Rear Seat, Folding........................... 93Rear View Mirror............................. 99Rear Window Defogger.................. 66

Reclining the Seat Backs......... 88, 91Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 196Reminder Lights.............................. 53Remote Transmitter........................ 75Replacement Information

Air Cleaner Element.................. 253Coolant........................................ 241Engine Oil and Filter................. 235Fuses...........................................318Light Bulbs................................. 278Schedule..................................... 224Spark Plugs ....................... 256, 258Tires............................................ 271Wiper Blades.............................. 263

Replacing Seat Belts After aCrash.............................................42

Reserve Tank, Coolant.................. 184Restraint, Child................................ 19Reverse Gear Position................... 198Rotation, Tire................................. 271

Safety Belts......................................... 8Safety Defects, Reporting* .......... 344

Safety Features.................................. 7Airbags............................................ 9Door Locks................................... 10Head Restraints........................... 10Seat Belts........................................ 8Seats & Seat-Backs...................... 10

Safety Labels, Location of.............. 50Safety Messages................................ iiSeat Belts............................................ 8

Additional Information................ 40Automatic Seat Belt

Tensioners................................ 41Cleaning...................................... 292Lap/Shoulder Belt....................... 40Maintenance................................. 42Reminder Light and

Beeper................................. 40, 54System Components.................... 40Use During Pregnancy................ 17

Seats, Adjusting the......................... 88Security System............................. 175Serial Number................................ 324Service Intervals............................ 224Service Manual*............................ 345Service Station Procedures .......... 178

Page 356: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Index

Setting the Clock........................... 101The 5-speed Manual

Transmission.......................... 195Shift Lever Position Indicator...... 197Shift Lock Release......................... 200Side Airbags..................................... 45

How Your Side Airbags Work.... 45How The Side Airbag Indicator

Light Works............................. 46Side Marker Lights, Bulb

Replacement............................... 279Signaling Turns................................ 64Snow Tires...................................... 273Solvent-type Cleaners.................... 288Sound System........................ 125, 153Spare Tire

Inflating....................................... 297Specifications............................. 330

Spark Plugs, Replacing........ 256, 258Specifications Charts..................... 328Speed Control................................... 68Speed Limiter........................ 196, 200Speedometer.................................... 58SRS, Additional Information........... 43

Additional Safety Precautions.... 23How Your Airbags Work..... 43, 45

How Your SRS IndicatorWorks........................................43

SRS Components......................... 43SRS Service................................... 48

SRS Indicator............................. 43, 55START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 74Starting the Engine........................ 193

In Cold Weather at HighAltitude................................... 194

With a Dead Battery................. 306Steam Coming from Engine......... 308Steering Wheel

Adjustment................................... 67Anti-theft Column Lock.............. 73

Stereo Sound System........... 125, 153Storing Your Car............................. 287Sun Visor......................................... 105Sunglasses Holder......................... 106Supplemental Restraint System

Servicing....................................... 48SRS Indicator......................... 43, 55System Components.................... 43

Synthetic Oil................................... 235

Tachometer...................................... 58Taillights, Changing Bulbs in....... 281Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 295Tape Player ........................... 130, 160Technical Descriptions

DOT Tire Quality Grading....... 329Emissions Control Systems...... 332Oxygenated Fuels...................... 331Three Way Catalytic

Converter................................ 335Temperature Gauge........................ 59Tether Attachment Points.............. 37Three Way Catalytic Converter... 335Time, Setting the........................... 101Timing Belt..................................... 267Tire Chains..................................... 273Tire, How to Change a Flat.......... 297

CONTINUED

Page 357: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Index

Tires................................................ 267Air Pressure............................... 268Checking Wear.......................... 270Compact Spare........................... 298DOT Tire Quality Grading....... 331Inflation....................................... 268Inspection................................... 270Replacing.................................... 271Rotating....................................... 271Snow............................................273Specifications............................. 328

Tools, Tire Changing.................... 297Towing

ATrailer......................................211Emergency Wrecker................. 320

Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator............................... 56, 207Operation................................... 207

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

Automatic...................... 247, 248Checking Fluid Level,

Manual.................................... 248Fluid Selection .................. 247, 248Identification Number............... 319Shifting the Automatic.............. 196

Shifting the Manual................... 195Treadwear...................................... 329Trip Meter........................................ 59Trunk................................................. 80

Opening the.................................. 80Open Monitor Light.................... 56

Turn Signals..................................... 64

Underside, Cleaning...................... 293Unexpected, Taking Care

of the........................................... 295Uniform Tire Quality Grading..... 329Unleaded Gasoline......................... 178Upholstery Cleaning...................... 292Used Oil, How to Dispose of........ 238

Vanity Mirror................................. 105Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 189Vehicle Dimensions....................... 326Vehicle Identification Number..... 324Vehicle Storage.............................. 287VIN.................................................. 324

Vinyl Cleaning................................ 293Viscosity, Oil................................... 235

WARNING, Explanation of.............. iiWarning Labels, Location of.......... 50Warranty Coverages*................... 341Washer, Windshield

Checking the Fluid Level......... 246Operation...................................... 65

Washing.......................................... 290Waxing and Polishing................... 289Wheels

Adjusting the Steering................ 66Alignment and Balance............. 270Compact Spare........................... 296Wrench....................................... 298

WindowsCleaning......................................292Operating the Power................... 97Rear, Defogger............................ 66

WindshieldCleaning........................................ 64Washers........................................ 66

Page 358: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Wipers, WindshieldChanging Blades........................ 263Operation...................................... 64

Worn Tires..................................... 270Wrecker, Emergency Towing....... 320

*: U.S. and Canada only

Index

Page 359: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

Fuel Tank Capacity:17.12 US gal (64.8 l, 14.26 Imp gal)

Recommended Engine Oil:API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page 235 ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4-cylinder models4.5 US qt (4.3 l, 3.8 imp qt)

6-cylinder models4.6 US qt (4.4 l, 3.9 Imp qt)

Automatic Transmission Fluid:Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred,or a DEXRON® III ATF as atemporary replacement (seepages 247 and 248).

5-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an API serviceSG, SH or SJ, SAE 10W-30 or10W- 40 motor oil as a temporaryreplacement (see page 249).

Capacity:2.0 US qt (1.9 l,1.7 Imp qt)

Power Steering Fluid:Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brandof power steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page 252).

Brake Fluid:Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluidpreferred, or a DOT 3 or DOT 4brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page 251).

Tire Pressure (measured cold):DX

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm 2)LX, EX, LX V-6, EX V-6

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm2)

Page 360: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

AM/FM/Cassette/CD StereoAudio SystemYour Honda's audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

Comfort and Convenience Features A

Page 361: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Operating the RadioThe ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON SEEK BUTTONS

AM BUTTON

Comfort and Convenience Features B

Page 362: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

TUNE — Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob clockwise to tune to ahigher frequency, orcounterclockwise to tune to a lowerfrequency.

SEEK — The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button or thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

SCAN — The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. The system will scanup the band for a station with astrong signal. When it finds one, itwill stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Preset — You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

2. Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

3. Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station's frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle's battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features C

Page 363: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

AUTO SELECT — If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a "0"displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

Comfort and Convenience Features

A. SEL BUTTON

A. SEL INDICATOR

D

Page 364: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS

Comfort and Convenience Features E

Page 365: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader — These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

BASS/FADERCONTROL

TREBLE/BALANCECONTROL

Treble/Bass — Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

Comfort and Convenience Features F

Page 366: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Operating the CD PlayerYou operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the system on, insert the discinto the CD slot. Push the disc inhalfway, the drive will pull it in therest of the way and begin to play.The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. In allcases, play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play that disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM orFM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off. CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

CD SLOT SKIP BUTTONS

REPEAT BUTTON CD BUTTON RDM BUTTON

G

Page 367: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold an appropriate SKIP button.Press the button to move forward,or the button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

REPEAT — To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the Repeatbutton. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRepeat button again to turn it off.

RANDOM PLAY — This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

Comfort and Convenience Features H

Page 368: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

CD Player Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features I

Page 369: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

CD Changer Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features J

Page 370: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

Operating the Cassette PlayerThe cassette system features DolbyB* noise reduction, automaticsensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO2)tape, and autoreverse for continuousplay.

Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

* Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. "DOLBY" and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

PLAYBUTTON

REWBUTTON DOLBY BUTTON

FF BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

PROG BUTTON CD BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONS

K

Page 371: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noisereduction, turn it off by pressing theNR button.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press the AM,FM or CD button. To change back tothe cassette player, push the TAPEbutton.

Tape Search FunctionsWith a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

FF/REW — Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

Comfort and Convenience Features L

Page 372: 2001 Accord Sedan Online Reference ... - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AAC0101OM/enu/AC0101OM.pdf · Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however,

Audio System

SKIP — The SKIP function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

REPEAT — The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the REPEATbutton to activate it; you will seeREPEAT displayed as a reminder.When the system reaches the end ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, it will automatically go intorewind. When it senses thebeginning of the same song orpassage, the system returns to PLAYmode. It will continue to repeat thissame program until you deactivateREPEAT by pressing the buttonagain.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Comfort and Convenience Features M